BMW 2015 550i xDrive Sedan User Manual

Owner's Manual

for Vehicle

The Ultimate

Driving Machine®

THE BMW 5 SERIES SEDAN.

OWNER'S MANUAL.

Contents

A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

5 Series

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Thank you for choosing a BMW.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control

you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.

Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐

tains important information on vehicle operation that will help

you make full use of the technical features available in your

BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐

hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to

maintaining the value of your BMW.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or

Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the

printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.

Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐

chures in the onboard literature.

We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.

BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:

www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written

consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English II/15, 03 15 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached

without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

We wanted to provide you with some updates

and clarifications with respect to the printed

BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and

clarifications will supersede the materials con-

tained in that document.

1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser-

vice center,” “your service center,” “service

specialist,” or “service” are used in the

Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that

the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service

center or another service center or repair

shop that employs trained personnel that

can perform maintenance and repair work

on your vehicle in accordance with BMW

specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con-

tains an affirmative instruction to contact a

“service center” or “your service center,”

we wanted to clarify that BMW recom-

mends that, if you are faced with one of the

situations addressed by that text, you con-

tact or seek the assistance of a BMW

dealer's service center or another service

center or repair shop that employs trained

personnel that can perform maintenance

and repair work on your vehicle in accor-

dance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no

cost to you, will pay for repairs required by

the limited warranties provided with respect

to your vehicle and for maintenance under

the Maintenance Program during the appli-

cable warranty and maintenance coverage

periods, you are free to elect, both during

those periods and thereafter, to have main-

tenance and repair work provided by other

service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer-

ence to parts and accessories having been

approved by BMW, those references are

intended to reflect that those parts and

accessories are recommended by BMW of

North America LLC. You may elect to use

other parts and accessories, but, if you do,

we recommend that you make sure that any

such parts and/or accessories are appropri-

ate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis-

cussion of homologation, where it states

that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for

your vehicle there,” the text should read

that you “may not be able to lodge warranty

claims for your vehicle there.”

5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso-

ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the

word “cannot” should read “does not.”

6. At page 58, in the “Check and replace

safety belts” section, the text beginning,

“This should only be done by your service

center …” should be disregarded and the

following text should be read in lieu thereof:

“BMW recommends having this work per-

formed by a service center as it is important

that this safety feature functions properly.”

7. At page 59, under the heading: “Active

head restraint,” the paragraph beginning,

“Only attach accessories …” should be dis-

regarded and the following text should be

read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends

that you attach accessories approved by

BMW to the seat or head restraint.”

8. At page 102, under the heading: “Special

windshield,” the paragraph beginning,

“Therefore, have the special windshield …”

should be disregarded and the following

text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW

recommends that you have the special

windshield replaced by the service center.”

9. At page 190 under the heading: “Objects

within the range of movement of the ped-

als” and at page 254 under the heading:

“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph

that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should

be disregarded and the following language

should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu-

facturer of your vehicle recommends that

you use floor mats that have been identified

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Addendum

by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle

and that can be properly fixed in place.”

10. At page 196, under the heading: “Have

maintenance carried out,” the sentence

beginning, “The maintenance should be

carried out …” should be disregarded and

the following text should be read in lieu

thereof: “BMW recommends that you have

the maintenance carried out by your service

center.”

11. At page 211, under the heading “Tire infla-

tion specifications,” the sentence begin-

ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications

apply to approved tire sizes …” should be

disregarded.

12. At page 223, under the heading: “Mount-

ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have

mounting and balancing …” should be dis-

regarded and the following text should be

read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends

that you have mounting and balancing per-

formed by your service center or a tire

mounting specialist.”

13. At page 223, under the heading: “Approved

wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”

should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,

the term “Recommended” should be read

in its place. In addition, the text of that sec-

tion should be disregarded and the follow-

ing text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly

suggests that you use wheels and tires that

have been recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer for your vehicle type; other-

wise, for example, despite having the same

official size ratings, variations can lead to

body contact and with it, the risk of severe

accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not

evaluate non-recommended wheels and

tires to determine if they are suitable for use

on your vehicle.

14. At page 228, under the heading: “Snow

Chains,” the text should be disregarded and

the following text should be read in lieu

thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains

have been tested by the manufacturer of

your vehicle and are determined by the

manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe

and are recommended by the manufacturer

of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow

chains is available from a service center.

15. At page 229, under the heading “Hood,” the

sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”

should be disregarded.

16. At page 233, under the heading: “Engine oil

change,” the text should be disregarded

and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil

changed at your BMW dealer's service cen-

ter or at another service center that has

trained personnel that can perform the work

in accordance with BMW specifications.

17. At page 236, under the heading: “Service

and Warranty Information Booklet for US

models and Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models,” the second

paragraph should be disregarded and the

following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you have maintenance and

repair performed by your BMW dealer's ser-

vice center or another service center or

repair shop that employs trained personnel

that can perform maintenance and repair

work on your vehicle in accordance with

BMW specifications. The manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you maintain

records of all maintenance and repair work

performed on your vehicle.

18. At page 239 and page 240, where it reads:

“Do not perform work/bulb replacement on

xenon headlights,” that text should be dis-

regarded and in lieu thereof the following

text should be read: “Xenon headlight work

or replacement can cause serious and fatal

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Addendum

injuries.” In the text that follows, where it

reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon light-

ing system … ,” the following words should

be read as preceding that passage: “It is

strongly suggested that you …”

19. At page 243, under the “Battery replace-

ment” section, the text should be disre-

garded and in lieu thereof the following text

should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you use vehicle batteries that it

has tested and recommends for use in your

vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be

damaged and systems or functions may not

be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufac-

turer of your vehicle recommends that you

have the battery registered on your vehicle

by a service center to ensure that all com-

fort functions are fully available, and that

any “check control” messages of these

comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐

ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to

page 262.

6 Notes

At a glance

14 Cockpit

18 iDrive

26 Voice activation system

29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Controls

34 Opening and closing

53 Adjusting

65 Transporting children safely

69 Driving

84 Displays

103 Lights

108 Safety

135 Driving stability control systems

143 Driving comfort

165 Climate control

172 Interior equipment

181 Storage compartments

Driving tips

188 Things to remember when driving

192 Loading

195 Saving fuel

Mobility

204 Refueling

206 Fuel

211 Wheels and tires

229 Engine compartment

231 Engine oil

234 Coolant

236 Maintenance

238 Replacing components

245 Breakdown assistance

251 Care

Reference

258 Technical data

262 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐

ular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in

the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial

deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline

for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐

pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the

vehicle.

User's manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication

The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐

munication and the short commands of the

voice activation system are described in a sep‐

arate user's manual, which is also included

with the onboard literature.

Additional sources of

information

The service center will be happy to answer any

See also: Convenient opening, refer to

page 37, via remote control.

Closing

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,

injuries may result.◀

▷

Pull the switch to the resistance

point.

The window closes while the switch is

held.

Seite 48

Controls Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷

Pull the switch beyond the resistance

point.

The window closes automatically. Pulling

again stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,

refer to page 43.

Pinch protection system

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐

tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check

that the window's closing path is clear; other‐

wise, the closing action may not stop in certain

situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

No window accessories

Do not install any accessories in the win‐

dow's range of movement; otherwise, the

pinch protection system will be impaired.◀

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a

window closes, closing is interrupted.

The window reopens slightly.

Closing without the pinch protection

system

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,

injuries may result.◀

E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐

vent window from closing properly - proceed

as follows:

Pull the reel past the resistance point and

hold it there.

The pinch protection is limited and the

window reopens slightly if the closing force

exceeds a certain margin.

2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again

within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch

General information

The safety switch in the driver's door can be

used to prevent children, e.g., from opening

and closing the rear windows using the

switches in the rear.

Switching on and off

Press button.

The LED lights up if the safety func‐

tion is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation

Press the safety switch when transport‐

ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may

result if the windows are closed without super‐

vision.◀

Roller sunblinds

General information

If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐

blind for the rear window after having activated

it a number of times in a row, the system is

blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐

ing. Let the system cool.

The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot

be moved at low interior temperatures.

Driver's door controls

Seite 49

Opening and closing Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Roller sunblind for rear window

Press button.

Roller sunblinds for the rear side

windows

Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook

it onto the bracket.

Do not open the window while the roller

sunblind is tilted

Do not open the window while the roller sun‐

blind is tilted; otherwise, there is a risk of dam‐

age at high speeds that may result in personal

injury.◀

Glass sunroof, powered

General information

The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be

operated together or separately, using the

same switch.

The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐

tion is switched on.

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐

erwise, injuries may result.◀

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐

not operate the glass sunroof and injure them‐

selves.◀

Tilting the glass sunroof

Push switch briefly upward.

▷ The closed glass sunroof is

tilted and the sliding visor

opens slightly.

▷ The opened glass sunroof

closes until it is in its tilted

position. The sliding visor

does not move.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sliding visor separately

▷ Press the reel in the desired

direction to the resistance

point and hold it there.

The sliding visor opens, as

long as the reel is held

down. If the sliding visor is

already fully open, the glass

sunroof opens.

The glass sunroof closes as

long as the reel is held

down. If the glass sunroof is

already closed or in the tilted

position, the sliding visor

closes.

▷ Press the reel in the desired direction past

the resistance point.

The sliding visor opens automatically. If the

sliding visor is already fully open, the glass

sunroof opens automatically.

The glass sunroof closes automatically. If

the glass sunroof is already closed or in the

Seite 50

Controls Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐

tomatically.

Pressing the reel upward stops the motion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sliding visor together

Briefly press the reel twice in

succession in the desired direc‐

tion past the resistance point.

The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐

sor move together. Pressing the

reel upward stops the motion.

▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to

page 37, via remote control.

▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐

cess, refer to page 43.

Comfort position

If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐

pletely opened, the comfort position has been

attained. In this position the wind noises in the

interior are the least.

If desired, continue the movement by pressing

the reel.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐

roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐

ment is stopped, beginning at approximately

the middle of the opening in the roof, or from

the tilted position during closing.

The glass sunroof reopens slightly.

Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐

tection

Despite the pinch protection system, check

that the glass sunroof's closing path is clear;

otherwise, the closing action may not be inter‐

rupted in certain extreme situations, such as

when thin objects are present.◀

Closing from the open position

without pinch protection

E. g. if there is an external danger, proceed as

follows:

1. Press the reel forward beyond the resist‐

ance point and hold.

The pinch protection is limited and the

glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing

force exceeds a certain margin.

2. Press the reel forward again beyond the re‐

sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐

roof closes without jam protection. Make

sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position

without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, push the reel for‐

ward past the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐

tion.

Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure during the opening or

closing process, the glass sunroof can only be

operated to a limited extent.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle

is stationary and the engine is running.

During the initialization, the glass sunroof

closes without jam protection.

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor closing and make sure that the

closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; oth‐

erwise, injuries may result.◀

Press the reel up and hold it until

the initialization is complete:

▷ Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com‐

pleted when the glass sun‐

roof and sliding visor are

completely closed.

Seite 51

Opening and closing Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐

tection.

Seite 52

Controls Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Adjusting

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Sitting safely

The ideal seating position can make a vital

contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

The seating position plays an important role in

an accident in combination with:

▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.

▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.

▷ Airbags, refer to page 108.

Seats

Hints

Do not adjust the seat while driving

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐

ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected

movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle

control could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under

the safety belt in the event of an accident. This

would eliminate the protection normally pro‐

vided by the belt.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;

otherwise, people might get injured or objects

damaged.◀

Semi-electrically adjustable seats

At a glance

1 Forward/backward

2 Thigh support

3 Height, tilt

4 Backrest

5 Lumbar support

Tilt

Move the control in the desired direction until

the desired tilt is set.

Seite 53

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired

direction.

After releasing the control, move the seat for‐

ward or back slightly making sure it engages

properly.

Height

Move the button in the required direction.

Backrest

Move the button in the required direction.

Electrically adjustable seats

Overview

1 Thigh support

2 Forward/back, height, tilt

3 Shoulder support

4 Backrest width

5 Lumbar support

6 Backrest, head restraint

General information

The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored

for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐

cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐

sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,

refer to page 46, is activated for this purpose.

Adjustments in detail

Forward/back.

Seite 54

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

2. Height.

3. Seat tilt.

4. Backrest tilt.

5. Thigh support.

Thigh support

Multifunctional seat

Adjust the position using the lever.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐

justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐

gion of the spine. The lower back and the

spine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear section

of the switch.

The curvature is increased/

decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐

tion of the switch.

The curvature is shifted up/

down.

Backrest width

Change the width of the back‐

rest using the side wings to ad‐

just the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,

the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

Seite 55

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Shoulder support

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:

▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.

▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Active seat

Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐

tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to

help prevent lower back pain.

Press button. The LED lights up.

Front seat heating

Switching on

Press button once for each tempera‐

ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached when

three LEDs are lit.

If the journey is continued within approx. 15

minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐

ically with the temperature selected last.

When ECO PRO, refer to page 196, is acti‐

vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

Temperature distribution

The heating action in the seat cushion and

backrest can be distributed in different ways.

On the Control Display:

"Climate"

2. "Front seat heating"

3. Select the required seat.

4. Turn the controller to set the temperature

distribution.

Rear seat heating

Switching on

Press button once for each tempera‐

ture level.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The maximum temperature is reached when

three LEDs are lit.

If the journey is continued within approx. 15

minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐

ically with the temperature selected last.

When ECO PRO, refer to page 196, is acti‐

vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switch off

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

Active seat ventilation, front

The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are

cooled by means of integrated fans.

The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐

cle interior is overheated or for continuous

cooling at high temperatures.

Switching on

Press button once for each ventilation

level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs

are lit.

After a short time, the system automatically

moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐

cessive cooling.

Switch off

Press button longer.

The LEDs go out.

Safety belts

Seats with safety belt

The vehicle has five seats, each of which is

equipped with a safety belt.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being

worn by all occupants before driving off.

For the occupants' safety the belt locking

mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the

belt out of the holder when applying it.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing

added protection, they are not a substitute for

safety belts.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point

will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐

ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,

integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐

sengers sitting on the left and right.

▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely

intended for the center passenger.

Hints

One person per safety belt

Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or

small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the belt

Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the

body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies

low around the hips in the lap area and does

not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt

can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐

jure the abdomen.

The safety belt must not lie across the neck,

rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable

objects, or be pinched.◀

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

What reduces the restraining effect

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull

the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the

tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;

otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the

restraining effect is reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

the belt buckle.

Tensioning the safety belt

automatically

When the belt is closed, it is automatically

tightened once after the release.

Unbuckling the belt

Hold the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐

nism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's and

passenger's seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐

nal sounds. Make sure that the safety

belts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds above

approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated

if objects are placed on the front passenger

seat.

Safety mode

In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐

plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐

matically.

If the situation passes without an accident oc‐

curring, the belt tension relaxes.

If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐

cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt

using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the

belt before continuing on your trip.

Damage to safety belts

Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐

aged otherwise:

Have the safety belts, including the safety belt

tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors

checked.

Check and replace safety belts

This should only be done by your service

center; otherwise, this safety feature might not

work properly.◀

Front head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event

of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint

Adjust the head restraints of all occupied

seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased

risk of injury in an accident.◀

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is

approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint

is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐

tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐

ically reduces the distance from the head.

Reduced protective function

▷ Do not use seat or head restraint

covers.

▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

on the head restraints.

▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW

to the seat or head restraint.

Otherwise, the protective function of the active

head restraint will be impaired and the per‐

sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐

gered.◀

Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐

aged otherwise:

Have the active headrest checked and if

needed replaced.

Adjusting the height: manual head

restraints

▷ To raise: push.

▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push

headrest down.

Adjusting the height: electrical head

restraints

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head:

manual head restraints

▷ Forward: by pulling.

▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.

Distance to the back of the head:

electrical head restraints

The head restraint is automatically reposi‐

tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.

Seite 59

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold forward for increased lateral support in

the resting position.

Removing

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event

of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint

Adjust the head restraints of all occupied

seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased

risk of injury in an accident.◀

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is

approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint

is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: push.

▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push

headrest down.

Folding forward

Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re‐

straint forward.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be

sitting in the seat in question.

Raise the head restraint up against the re‐

sistance.

Seite 60

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐

straint out completely.

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐

tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐

able.◀

Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory

The concept

Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions

can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and

called up. Settings for the backrest width and

lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Hints

Do not retrieve the memory while driving

Do not retrieve the memory setting while

driving, as an unexpected movement of the

seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐

dent.◀

Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep

the seat's area of movement unobstructed;

otherwise, people might get injured or objects

damaged.◀

At a glance

Front

Storing

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Set the desired position.

Press button. The LED in the but‐

ton lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED

is lit. The LED goes out.

If the SET button is pressed accidentally:

Press button again.

The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

Comfort function

Open the driver's door.

2. Switch off the ignition.

3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.

The corresponding seat position is performed

automatically.

The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting

the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Safety mode

Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐

tion.

2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com‐

pleted.

Calling up of a seat position

deactivated

After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐

tions is deactivated to save battery power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid.

▷ Press a button on the remote control.

▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

Seite 61

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the passenger side is more

curved than the driver's side mirror.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐

ror setting is stored for the profile currently in

use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐

mote control, the position is automatically re‐

trieved if this function is active.

Note

Estimating distances correctly

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance

to the traffic behind you based on what you

see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk

of an accident.◀

At a glance

1 Adjusting 62

2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor

3 Fold in and out 62

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror:

Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

The setting corresponds to the direc‐

tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positions

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer

to page 61.

Adjusting manually

In case of electrical malfunction press edges of

mirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on

the front passenger side is tilted downward.

This improves your view of the curb and other

low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror

position.

Fold in and out

Press button.

Possible at speeds up to approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.

E. g. this is advantageous

▷ In car washes.

▷ In narrow streets.

▷ For folding mirrors back out that were

folded away manually.

Seite 62

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐

matically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash

Before washing the car in an automatic

car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or

with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could

be damaged, depending on the width of the

vehicle.◀

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated

whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐

med. Photocells are used to control the Interior

rearview mirror, refer to page 63.

Interior rearview mirror, manually

dimmable

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by

the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic

dimming feature

The concept

Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.

▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement

For proper operation:

▷ Keep the photocells clean.

▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Note

Do not adjust while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement

could result in an accident.◀

Seite 63

Adjusting Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐

tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Power steering wheel adjustment

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐

rections.

Storing the position

Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer

to page 61.

Steering wheel heating

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min,

steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐

vated again.

Seite 64

Controls Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

The right place for children

Note

Children in the vehicle

Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐

selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the

doors.◀

Children should always be in the rear

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children is in the back seat.

Transporting children in the rear

Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in

the rear in child restraint systems provided in

accordance with the age, weight and size of

the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk

of injury in an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a

safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

system can no longer be used due to their age,

weight and size.◀

Children on the front passenger seat

Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐

straint system in the front passenger seat,

make sure that the front, knee and side airbags

on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐

ger airbags, refer to page 110.

Note

Deactivating the front-seat passenger

airbags

If a child restraint system is used in the front

passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐

senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐

creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐

bags are activated, even with a child restraint

system.◀

Installing child restraint

systems

Hints

Manufacturer's information for child re‐

straint systems

To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐

tems, observe the information provided by the

system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐

tive effect can be lost.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seat

When installing child restraint systems,

make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐

tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and

headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐

justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that

all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise

the stability of the child seat can be affected,

and there is an increased risk of injury because

Seite 65

Transporting children safely Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐

rest.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Deactivating the front-seat passenger

airbags

If a child restraint system is used in the front

passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐

senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐

creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐

bags are activated, even with a child restraint

system.◀

After installing a child restraint system in the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front,

knee and side airbags on the front passenger

side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags

automatically, refer to page 110.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move

the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐

ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain

the best possible position for the belt and to

offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐

dent.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐

cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,

move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐

til the best possible belt guide position is

reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger

safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐

ten child restraint systems.

The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐

nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

Pull out the strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it

tight against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

Unbuckle the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐

dren.

Note

Follow manufacturer's information for

LATCH child restraint systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint

systems, observe the operating and safety in‐

formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐

Seite 66

Controls Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

erwise, the level of protection may be re‐

duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the

CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child

and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child

is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Note

Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐

chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have

properly engaged and that the child restraint

system is resting snugly against the backrest;

otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐

duced.◀

Position

The corresponding symbol shows the

mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are

marked with a pair (2) of LATCH sym‐

bols. Use of inner lower anchors from

standard outboard LATCH positions to

install a child restraint system in the center is

not recommended. For the center position,

use the vehicle seat belt instead.

Before installing LATCH child

restraint systems

Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐

straint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint

systems

Mount the child restraint system; refer to

the user's manual of the system.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap

Mounting points

The respective symbol shows the an‐

chor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper Top Tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on

the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Note

Mounting eyelets

Use the mounting eyes only for the up‐

per retaining strap to secure child restraint

systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could

be damaged.◀

Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap

Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as

it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the

strap will not properly secure the child restraint

system in the event of an accident.◀

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Mounting point/eye

5 Rear window shelf

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap

Seite 67

Transporting children safely Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point

1. Remove the mounting point cover.

2. Raise the head restraint. Do not change

the middle head restraint.

3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.

Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐

dle seat.

4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the mounting eye.

5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.

6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Locking the doors and

windows

Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside

only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press button on the driver's door if

children are being transported in the

rear.

This locks various functions so that they can‐

not be operated from the rear: safety switch,

refer to page 49.

Seite 68

Controls Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Start/Stop button

The concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button

switches the ignition on or off

and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: The

engine starts if the brakes are

stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐

ton.

Manual transmission: The engine starts with

the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop

button is pressed.

Ignition on

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop

button without stepping on the brake.

Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐

ton without stepping on the clutch pedal.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator and warning lights in the

instrument cluster light up for a varied length

of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off,

switch off the ignition and any unnecessary

electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop

button again without stepping on the brake.

Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐

ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go

out.

To save battery power when the engine is off,

switch off the ignition and any unnecessary

electronic systems/power consumers.

P when the ignition is switched off

P is engaged automatically when the ig‐

nition is switched off. When in an automatic car

wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not

switched off accidentally.◀

The ignition automatically cuts off while the

vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:

▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the

low beams are activated.

▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be

started. This function is only available

when the low beams are turned off.

▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if

the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the low beams are turned off.

▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled

with driver's door open and low beams off.

The low beams switch to parking lights after

approx. 15 minutes of no use.

Radio ready state

Activate radio-ready state:

▷ When the engine is running: press the

Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power consumers

remain ready for operation.

Seite 69

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The radio-ready state switches off automati‐

cally:

▷ After approx. 8 minutes.

▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐

tral locking system.

▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still be

started.

The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,

the ignition is automatically switched off for the

following reasons:

▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.

▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

▷ When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is

switched on, the system automatically

switches to the radio-ready state if the lights

are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,

the daytime running lights are activated.

Starting the engine

Hints

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may

lead to loss of consciousness and death. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an

odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicle

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with

the engine running; doing so poses a risk of

danger.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐

ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐

mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐

vent the vehicle from moving.◀

Repeated starting in quick succession

Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐

edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the

fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,

posing a risk of overheating and damage to the

catalytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while

the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at

moderate engine speeds.

Diesel engine

If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐

low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may

be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐

heating.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐

gine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐

tral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a

certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐

gine starts.

Seite 70

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Engine stop

Hints

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐

not start the engine.◀

Apply parking brake and further secure

the vehicle if needed.

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐

erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward

and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐

hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the

direction of the curb.◀

Before driving into a car wash

So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐

serve instructions for going into an automatic

car wash, refer to page 251.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

Engage selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

The concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.

The system switches off the engine during a

stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic

lights. The ignition remains switched on. The

engine starts again automatically for driving

off.

Automatic mode

After every start of the engine using the Start/

Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in

the last selected state, refer to page 73.

When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it

is available when the vehicle is traveling faster

than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop

The engine is switched off automatically dur‐

ing a stop under the following conditions:

Steptronic transmission:

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.

▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the

vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held

by Automatic Hold.

▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

Manual transmission:

▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is

not pressed.

▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the

driver's door is closed.

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced

when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function is

ready for an Automatic engine

start.

Seite 71

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The display indicates that the

conditions for an automatic en‐

gine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in

the following situations:

▷ External temperature too low.

▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐

matic climate control is running.

▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated

or cooled to the required level.

▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐

ature.

▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the

steering wheel is being turned.

▷ After driving in reverse.

▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.

▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

▷ At higher elevations.

▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.

▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.

▷ The parking assistant is activated.

▷ Stop-and-go traffic.

▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or

▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐

lowing conditions:

▷ Steptronic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.

When Automatic Hold is activated: press

the accelerator pedal.

▷ Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is pressed.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it

will not start again automatically if any one of

the following conditions are met.

▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and

the driver's door is open.

▷ The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied

length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/

Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐

vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐

lowing situations:

▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior

when the cooling function is switched on.

▷ The steering wheel is turned.

▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐

lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.

▷ The vehicle begins rolling.

▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐

matic climate control is switched on.

▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when

the heating is switched on.

▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐

cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a

number of times in succession.

Seite 72

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Activating/deactivating the system

manually

Using the button

Press button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is

deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic

engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started

via the Start/Stop button.

▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is

activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle

can be switched off permanently, e. g., when

leaving it.

Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is

switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function

is deactivated.

Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐

matically.

2. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function

is deactivated automatically for safety reasons

as if the driver were absent.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer

switches off the engine automatically. A Check

Control message is displayed. It is possible to

continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake

The concept

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐

cle from rolling when it is parked.

Overview

Parking brake

Setting

Apply parking brake and further secure

the vehicle if needed.

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐

erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward

and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐

hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the

direction of the curb.◀

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐

not release the parking brake.◀

Pull the reel.

The LED lights up.

Seite 73

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The indicator lamp lights up red. The

parking brake is set.

While driving

Use as emergency brake while driving:

Pull the reel and hold it. The vehicle brakes

hard while the reel is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐

nal sounds and the brake lights light

up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speed

of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is

set.

Releasing

With the ignition switched on:

Manual transmission: Press the switch

while the brake or clutch pedal is

pressed.

Steptronic transmission: Press the switch

while the brake is pressed or selector lever po‐

sition P is set.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with

Steptronic transmission

Inadvertent operation of the accelerator

pedal

Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐

erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is

set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐

dent.◀

For automatic release, step on the accelerator

pedal.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is automatically released

when you step on the accelerator:

▷ Engine on.

▷ Drive mode engaged.

▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual

transmission

Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen‐

gages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking

brake is automatically released:

▷ Engine on.

▷ Gear engaged.

▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

▷ Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Inadvertent operation of the clutch pedal

Make sure that the clutch pedal is not

operated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehi‐

cle is set in motion when the clutch is released,

and there is a risk of an accident.◀

Automatic Hold

The concept

This system assists the driver by automatically

setting and releasing the brake, such as when

moving in stop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle is automatically held in place when

it is stationary.

On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle

from rolling backward when driving off.

Overview

Seite 74

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Automatic Hold

Safety information

Secure the vehicle against rolling

Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐

gine running, engage position P of the Step‐

tronic transmission and ensure that the park‐

ing brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may

begin to move.◀

Under the following conditions, Automatic

Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐

ing brake is set:

▷ The engine is switched off.

▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.

▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐

still using the parking brake.

The indicator lamp switches from

green to red and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Activating

This function can be activated when the driv‐

er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened

and the engine is running.

Press button.

The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic Hold is activated.

Deactivating

Press button again.

The LED and the letters AUTO H go

out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,

press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.

When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐

matic Hold is deactivated automatically.

Driving

Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐

tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐

ing to a standstill.

The indicator lamp lights up green.

Step on the accelerator pedal to drive

off.

The brake is released automatically.

The indicator lamp goes out.

Before driving into a car wash

Before driving into the car wash, deacti‐

vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking

brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary

and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀

Parking

The parking brake is automatically set if the

engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐

ing held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from green

to red.

The parking brake is not set if the en‐

gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐

ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.

Automatic Hold remains activated during the

engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/

Stop function.

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐

not release the parking brake.◀

Malfunction

In the event of a failure or malfunction of the

parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐

ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.

Seite 75

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

After a power failure

Putting the parking brake into

operation

1. Switch on the ignition.

Press the reel while stepping on the

brake pedal or selector lever position P is

set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be

put into operation. Any sounds associated with

this are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster goes out as soon as the parking

brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams,

headlight flasher

Turn signal

Hints

Do not adjust the exterior mirrors

Do not adjust the exterior mirror while

driving and when turn signals/hazard warning

flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐

nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐

tion and can't be seen.◀

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the

resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp

indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point.

The turn signal flashes three times.

The function can be activated or deactivated.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold

it there for as long as you want the turn signal

to flash.

High beams, headlight flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Seite 76

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief

wipe

Hints

Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐

shield

Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen

to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades

and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀

Do not activate wipers on dry windshield

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is

dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or

cause them to become worn more quickly.◀

Switching on

Push wiper lever up.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.

▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation

when the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press

once beyond the resistance point.

Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐

hicle comes to standstill.

Switch off and brief wipe

Push wiper lever down.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.

▷ Single wipe: press down once.

▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.

▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Interval mode or rain sensor

The concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time

between wipes depending on the intensity of

the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐

shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐

ror.

Activating/deactivating

Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped

with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.

When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper

operation is deactivated.

Seite 77

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

During trip interruption with the rain sensor

switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐

prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐

cally activated again.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐

intentional wiping can cause damages.◀

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

Clean the windshield, headlights

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐

shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐

lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐

vated.

Do not use the washer system at freezing

temperatures

Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze

onto the windshield which might impede your

viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid.

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is

empty; operation might damage pump.◀

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐

cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Fold wipers back when you want to change the

blades or with pending low temperatures.

Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. With icy conditions make sure that blades

are not frozen to the windshield.

3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point

of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐

onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly

vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the

wiper system must be reactivated.

Folding wipers back down

Before switching the ignition on, fold the

wipers back down to the windshield; other‐

wise, the wipers may become damaged when

they are activated.◀

Switch on the ignition.

2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to

their resting position and are ready again

for operation.

Washer fluid

Hints

Antifreeze for washer fluid

Antifreeze is flammable and can cause

injury if it is used incorrectly.

Seite 78

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Therefore, keep it away from possible sources

of ignition.

Only keep it in the closed original container

and inaccessible to children.

Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐

tainer.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is

regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual

states; do not exceed the allowable washer

fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the

usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐

tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐

centrate or the equivalent.◀

Adding washer fluid

Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to

avoid contact between the washer fluid and

hot engine parts.

Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to

personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

Washer fluid reservoir

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐

ervoir.

Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐

centrate and tap water and – if required – with a

washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐

turer's recommendations.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the

right mixture.

Do not add windshield washer concentrate and

antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure

water; this could damage the wiper system.

Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐

ferent manufacturers because they can clog

the windshield washer nozzles.

Recommended minimum fill quantity:

0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Manual transmission

Shifting

Shifting into 5th or 6th gear

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐

vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead

to engine damage.◀

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the selector

lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐

verse gear.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

D Drive

Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐

ation. All gears for forward travel are activated

automatically.

R is Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral:

The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car

washes, e.g.

When the ignition is switched off, refer to

page 69, selector lever position P is engaged

automatically.

Seite 79

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The

drive wheels are blocked.

P is engaged automatically:

▷ After the engine is switched off when the

vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to

page 69, or when the ignition is switched

off, refer to page 69, and when selector

lever position R or D is set.

▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐

tion N is set.

▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the

driver's door is opened, and the brake

pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is

stationary and selector lever position D or

R is set.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐

lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐

hicle may begin to move.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving

performance. Step on the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the full throttle

position.

Engaging selector lever positions

Press on the brake pedal until you start

driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you

select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake

pedal until you are ready to start.◀

▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector

lever position P until the engine is running

and the brake is applied.

▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the

brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;

otherwise, the shift command will not be

executed: shift lock.

Engaging D, R and N

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐

rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.

After releasing the selector lever, it returns to

its center position.

Press unlock button, in order to:

▷ Engage R.

▷ Shift out of P.

Engaging P

Press button P.

Seite 80

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐

tor lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster, e.g., S1.

The sport program of the transmission is acti‐

vated.

Activating the M/S manual mode

Press the selector lever to the left out of

selector lever position D.

2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward.

Manual mode becomes active and the gear is

changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster, e.g., M1.

Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S

manual mode is automatically upshifted as

needed.

Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.

▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐

wards.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine

and road speeds, for example downshifting is

not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐

strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐

lected gear.

Not M550d xDrive: Steptronic Sport

transmission: prevent automatic

upshifting in M/S manual mode

The Steptronic Sport transmission does not

automatically upshift in M/S manual mode

once the maximum speed is reached, if one of

the following conditions is met:

▷ DSC deactivated.

▷ TRACTION activated.

▷ SPORT+ activated.

In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

With the respective transmission version, the

lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐

taneously operating the kickdown and the left

shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐

duced via the shift paddles when switching

briefly from D to manual mode.

Ending the sport program/manual

mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow

you to shift gears quickly while keeping both

hands on the steering wheel.

▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.

Seite 81

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ With the respective transmission version,

the lowest possible gear can be selected

by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine

and road speeds, for example downshifting is

not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐

strument cluster, followed by the current gear.

If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are

used to shift gears in automatic mode, the

transmission temporarily switches to manual

mode.

If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐

sition D with the respective transmission ver‐

sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐

matic mode:

▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.

▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift

paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

In the manual mode, after conservative driving

for a certain amount of time or if there has

been no acceleration or shifting of the shift

paddles within a certain amount of time, the

transmission switches back to automatic

mode.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is dis‐

played, e.g.: P.

Electronic unlocking of the

transmission lock

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock to

maneuver vehicle from the danger area.

Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin

the engine.

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter

must audibly start.

3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐

tion N.

A corresponding Check Control message

is displayed.

4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐

tion N within approx. 6 seconds.

Position N is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starter

stops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area

and secure it against moving on its own.

Steptronic Sport transmission:

Launch Control

The concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration

on surfaces with good traction.

Hints

Component wear

Do not use Launch Control too often;

otherwise, this may result in premature wear of

components due to the high stress placed on

the vehicle.◀

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,

refer to page 188, period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC

again as soon as possible.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve

better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Requirements

Launch Control is available when the engine is

warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving

of at least 6 miles/10 km.

Seite 82

Controls Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

To start with Launch Control do not steer the

steering wheel.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

Press button or select Sport+ with

the Driving Dynamics Control.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument

cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF

lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on

the brake.

4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal

beyond the resistance point at the full

throttle position.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster.

5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within

3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐

mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding

conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used

again.

Seite 83

Driving Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge 92

2 Speedometer

3 Messages, e.g. Check Control

4 Tachometer 92

5 Engine oil temperature 92

6 Current fuel consumption

7 Electronic displays 84

8 Reset miles 92

Electronic displays

▷ Selection lists, refer to page 96.

▷ External temperature, refer to page 93.

▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 71.

▷ On-board computer, refer to page 97.

▷ Date, refer to page 93.

▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 94.

▷ Transmission display, refer to page 82.

▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 92.

Seite 84

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to

page 88.

▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to

page 93.

▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐

cation.

▷ Range, refer to page 93.

▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to

page 139.

▷ Service requirements, refer to page 94.

▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 95.

▷ Time, refer to page 93.

Multifunctional instrument display

The concept

The instrument display is a variable display. In

the event of a program change, the display

rendition adapts to the respective program

through the Driving Dynamics Control. The

change of appearance can be deactivated on

the Control Display.

Some of the displays in the instrument display

may differ from the way they are shown in this

Owner's Manual.

At a glance

1 Fuel gauge 92

2 Indicator/warning lights 88

3 Speedometer

4 Variable displays

5 Tachometer 92

Selection lists 96

ECO PRO displays 196

6 Engine oil temperature 92

Seite 85

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

7 Computer 97 8 Reset miles 92

Switching the change of display on and off

You can set whether the instrument display

automatically changes to the ECO PRO or

SPORT in the display when you switch driving

modes.

1. "Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "ECO PRO Info"

Or"Driving mode view"

With Professional Navigation System:

switching zoom function on/off

You can program whether the current speed is

to appear enlarged in the speedometer.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Magnifier function"

ECO PRO displays

1 Speedometer 2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐

ation assistant instructions, Driver assist

system displays

Seite 86

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

3 Efficiency display 196

4 Transmission display

5 ▷ Blue: bonus range

▷ Gray: range

In the ECO PRO program the instrument dis‐

play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These

displays support a driving style that saves on

fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐

sentation of the efficiency display and various

ECO PRO tips.

Sport displays

1 Speedometer

2 Tachometer 92

3 Transmission display 82

4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped

5 Performance display

6 Variable displays

In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐

ment display switches to the sport displays.

These displays support a sporty driving style

with more prominent representation of the

tachometer, the transmission displays, and the

vehicle speed.

Shift lights in the instrument display

The concept

Shift lights indicate the optimum shift moment

in the multifunction instrument display. Thus,

with a sporty driving style, the best possible

vehicle acceleration is achieved.

Seite 87

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

General information

Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are

shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is

activated.

Manual transmission: shift lights are shown,

when the SPORT or SPORT+ driving program

is activated.

Switching on shift lights

Steptronic Sport transmission:

1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐

ics Control.

2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the

transmission.

Manual transmission:

Select SPORT or SPORT+ using the Driv‐

ing Dynamics Control.

2. Deactivate DSC if needed.

Display in the instrument display

▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the

tachometer.

▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated

fields indicate an increase in the speed.

▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated

fields indicate the upcoming shift moment.

▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do

not wait any further to shift.

When the maximum possible speed is

reached, the entire display flashes. When the

maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of

fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐

gine. Speeds in this range must be avoided.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control system monitors functions

in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions

in the monitored systems.

A Check Control message is displayed as a

combination of indicator or warning lights and

text messages in the instrument cluster and in

the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a

text message may appear on the Control Dis‐

play.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐

ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐

nations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when the

engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on

the driver or passenger side is not

buckled. The safety belt reminder can

also be activated if objects are placed on the

front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned

correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner are

defective.

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐

ice center immediately.

Seite 88

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For additional information, refer to Release

parking brake, refer to page 74.

Brake system

Continue to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐

ice center immediately.

Front-end collision warning

Illuminated: advance warning is issued,

e.g., when there is the impending dan‐

ger of a collision or the distance to the

vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase distance.

Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐

ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches

another vehicle at a relatively high differential

speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐

neuver.

Pedestrian warning

Symbol in the instrument cluster.

Symbol in the instrument display.

If a collision with a person detected in this way

is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal

sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected

distance from the vehicle driving

ahead.

For additional information, refer to Active

Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,

refer to page 143.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐

tected.

Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐

quate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until you actively resume control by

pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐

ing force boost in some cases defec‐

tive. Stop carefully. Take into account

longer brake travel. Have this checked

by the service center immediately.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Flashing: DSC controls the drive and

braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐

lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving

profile to the driving circumstances.

Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system

checked by the service center.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic

Stability Control DSC, refer to page 135.

Seite 89

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction

Control is activated

Dynamic Stability Control DSC is

switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol DTC is switched on.

For additional information, refer to Dynamic

Stability Control, refer to page 135, and Dy‐

namic Traction Control, refer to page 136.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of

tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cau‐

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐

neuvers.

For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐

fer to page 115.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor

signals a loss of tire inflation pressure

in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid

sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no

flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be

detected.

▷ Interference through systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav‐

ing the area of the interference, the system

automatically becomes active again.

▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform

the reset of the system again.

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by

your service center.

For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor, refer to page 111.

Steering system

Steering system in some cases defec‐

tive.

Have the steering system checked by

the service center.

Engine functions

Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐

ice center.

For additional information, refer to On-

board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 237.

Lane departure warning

System is switched on and under cer‐

tain circumstances warns if a detected

lane is left without flashing beforehand.

For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐

ture warning, refer to page 129.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator

lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed.

For additional information, refer to Turn signal,

refer to page 76.

Parking lights, headlight control

Parking lights or headlights are acti‐

vated.

For additional information, refer to

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐

fer to page 103.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are activated.

Seite 90

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

For additional information, refer to Front fog

lights, refer to page 106.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are activated and off auto‐

matically as a function of the traffic sit‐

uation.

For additional information, refer to High-beam

Assistant, refer to page 105.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It maintains

the speed that was set using the con‐

trol elements on the steering wheel.

Automatic Hold

The vehicle is automatically held in

place when it is stationary.

On inclines, the system prevents the

vehicle from rolling backward when driving off.

For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐

fer to page 74.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are activated.

For additional information, refer to High

beams, refer to page 76.

General lamps

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is

displayed or is stored. The symbol is

shown in the display of the instrument

cluster.

Text messages

Text messages in combination with a symbol

in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐

trol message and the meaning of the indicator

and warning lights.

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of

an error or the required action, can be called up

via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be

automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Symbols

Depending on the Check Control message, the

following functions can be selected.

▷ "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the

Check Control message in the Integrated

Owner's Manual.

▷ "Service request"

Contact your service center.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the onboard computer button on the

turn signal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐

played continuously and are not cleared

until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐

eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐

sages are displayed consecutively.

Seite 91

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

These messages can be faded for approx.

8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐

played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are faded

automatically after approx. 20 seconds.

They are stored and can be displayed

again later.

Displaying stored Check Control

messages

On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are

displayed again after the ignition is switched

off.

Fuel gauge

Vehicle tilt position may cause

the display to vary.

Depending on the equipment

version, the arrow beside the

fuel pump symbol shows which

side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Hints on refueling, refer to page 204.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning

field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐

rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature

▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end.

Drive at moderate engine

and vehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐

ture: the pointer is in the

middle or in the left half of

the temperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of

the temperature range. A Check Control

message is also displayed.

Coolant temperature

If the coolant along with the engine becomes

too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 234.

Odometer and trip odometer

Display

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.

▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Show/reset kilometers

Press the knob.

▷ When the ignition is

switched off, the time, the

external temperature and

the odometer are displayed.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip

odometer is reset.

Seite 92

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

External temperature

If the indicator drops to

+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal

sounds.

A Check Control message is

displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Ice on roads

Even at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and

shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk

of an accident.◀

Time

The time is displayed at the bot‐

tom of the instrument cluster.

Setting the time and time for‐

mat, refer to page 99.

Date

The date is displayed in the

computer.

Setting the date and date for‐

mat, refer to page 100.

Range

Display

With a low remaining range:

▷ A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.

▷ The remaining range is

shown on the on-board co‐

mupter.

▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking

curves aggressively - engine operation

might vary.

The Check Control message appears continu‐

ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail

and damage might occur.◀

Displaying the cruising range

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,

the range can also be displayed as bar in the

instrument cluster.

"Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Additional indicators"

With navigation system: range with

destination guidance active

If respective equipment is fitted

and destination guidance is ac‐

tive, the remaining range is dis‐

played when the destination is

reached.

Current fuel consumption

Display

Depending on your vehicle's op‐

tional features, the current fuel

consumption can be displayed

in the instrument cluster. Check

whether you are currently driv‐

ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendly

manner.

Displaying the current fuel

consumption

"Settings"

Seite 93

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Additional indicators"

The bar display for the current fuel consump‐

tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Energy recovery

Display

The kinetic energy of the vehicle

is converted to electrical energy

while coasting. The vehicle bat‐

tery is partially charged and fuel

consumption can be reduced.

Service requirements

The concept

After the ignition is turned on the instrument

cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐

tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐

nance.

Your service specialist can read the current

service requirements from your remote con‐

trol.

Display

Data regarding the service status or legally

mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐

cally transmitted to your service center before

a service due date.

Detailed information on service

requirements

More information on the scope of service re‐

quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐

play.

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐

gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐

tion.

Symbols

Sym‐

bols

Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐

nance or a legally mandated inspec‐

tion is approaching.

The service deadline has already

passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are

set correctly.

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"

5. "Date:"

6. Adjust the settings.

7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally

mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐

cally transmitted to your service center before

a service due date.

You can check when your service center was

notified.

Seite 94

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Last Service Request"

Gear shift indicator

The concept

The system recommends the most fuel effi‐

cient gear for the current driving situation.

Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐

try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐

tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐

tronic transmission and with manual

transmission.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐

played in the instrument cluster.

On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the

engaged gear is displayed.

Manual transmission: displaying

Symbol Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift up to fuel efficient gear.

Shift down to fuel efficient gear.

Shift into neutral.

Steptronic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detection

The concept

Speed limit detection

Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the

shape of a traffic sign to display the currently

detected speed limit. The camera in the area of

the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs

at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐

head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐

bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐

tected and compared with the vehicle's

onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and

will be displayed depending on the situation.

The system takes into account the information

stored in the navigation system and also dis‐

plays speed limits present on routes without

signs.

Hints

Personal judgment

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic

situation.

The system assists the driver and does not re‐

place the human eye.◀

Seite 95

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

At a glance

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can

be displayed on the info display in the instru‐

ment cluster via the computer.

Display

The following is displayed in the instrument

cluster:

Speed limit detection

Current speed limit.

Speed limit detection is not

available.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and

may provide incorrect information in the fol‐

lowing situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

▷ When signs are concealed by objects.

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐

ered by a sticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the

camera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation

system are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐

tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation,

such as due to changes in road routing.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with a

speed sticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Selection lists in the

instrument cluster

The concept

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,

the following can be displayed or operated us‐

ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the

steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐

strument cluster and the Head-up Display:

▷ Current audio source.

▷ Redial phone feature.

Seite 96

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Turn on voice activation system.

Display

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,

the list in the instrument cluster can differ from

the illustration shown.

Activating a list and adjusting the

setting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turn

the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding

list.

Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐

ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

On-board computer

Indication in the info display

The information from the com‐

puter is shown in the info display

in the instrument cluster.

Calling up information on the info

display

Press the onboard computer button on the

turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the info display of

the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn

signal lever calls up the following information in

the info display:

▷ Range.

▷ Average consumption, fuel.

▷ Miles and trip miles.

For a multi-functional instrument display.

▷ Average speed.

▷ Date.

▷ Speed limit detection.

Not for a multi-functional instrument dis‐

play.

▷ Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in

the navigation system.

▷ Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in

the navigation system.

▷ ECO PRO bonus range.

Seite 97

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Adjusting the info display

Depending on the vehicle equipment version,

you can select what information from the com‐

puter is to be displayed on the info display of

the instrument cluster.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available

with the remaining fuel.

It is calculated based on your driving style over

the last 20 miles/30 km.

If there is only enough fuel left for less than

45 miles/80 km, the color of the display

changes.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the period while the engine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the distance traveled since the last reset by the

on-board comupter.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the

engine manually stopped are not included in

the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the onboard computer button

on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination

The distance remaining to the destination is

displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐

gation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted au‐

tomatically.

Time of arrival

The estimated time of arrival is

displayed if a destination is en‐

tered in the navigation system

before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detection

Description of the speed limit detection, refer

to page 95, function.

Trip computer

The vehicle features two types of board com‐

puters.

▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.

▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset

approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a

standstill.

Display on the Control Display

Display the computer or trip computer on the

Control Display.

"Vehicle info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Seite 98

Controls Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Resetting the fuel consumption or

speed

On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Onboard info"

3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"

4. "Yes"

Sport displays

The concept

On the Control Display, the current values for

performance and torque can be displayed if

the vehicle is appropriately equipped.

Displaying sport displays on the

Control Display

"Vehicle info"

2. "Sport displays"

Speed warning

The concept

Displays a speed, when reached, should cause

a warning to be issued.

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed

drops below the set speed once by at least

3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the

speed warning

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired speed

is displayed.

5. Press the controller.

Speed warning is stored.

Activating/deactivating the speed

warning

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the

speed warning

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed"

4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the

speed warning.

Settings on the Control

Display

Time

Setting the time zone

"Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:"

4. Select the desired time zone.

The time zone is stored.

Setting the time

"Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours

are displayed.

5. Press the controller.

Seite 99

Displays Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐

nutes are displayed.

7. Press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The time format is stored.

Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,

the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are

updated automatically.

"Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Auto time set"

Date

Setting the date

"Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is

displayed.

5. Press the controller.

6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format

"Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language

To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system,

refer to page 27.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure

To set the units for fuel consumption, route/

distance and temperature:

"Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness

To set the brightness of the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.

5. Press the controller.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Seite 100

Controls Displays

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐

ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Head-up Display

The concept

This system projects important information

into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.

The driver can get information without averting

his or her eyes from the road.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up

Display is influenced by the following factors:

▷ Certain sitting positions.

▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.

▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

▷ Wet roads.

▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐

tings.

Switching on/off

Press button.

Display

Overview

▷ Speed.

▷ Navigation system.

▷ Check Control messages.

▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.

▷ Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed

briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Head-Up Display"

3. "Displayed information"

4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the

ambient brightness.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Seite 101

Displays Controls

101

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Head-Up Display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller.

When the low beams are activated, the bright‐

ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐

ally influenced using the instrument lighting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Adjusting the height

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Head-Up Display"

3. "Height"

4. Turn the controller.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Setting the rotation

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Head-Up Display"

3. "Rotation"

4. Turn the controller.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Special windshield

The windshield is part of the system.

The shape of the windshield makes it possible

to display a precise image.

A film in the windshield prevents double im‐

ages from being displayed.

Therefore, have the special windshield re‐

placed by a service center only.

Seite 102

Controls Displays

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Overview

1 Rear fog lights

2 Front fog lights

3 Depending on the equipment: automatic

headlight control, Adaptive Light Control,

High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights,

Daytime running lights

4 Lights off, daytime running lights

5 Parking lights, daytime running lights

6 Depending on the equipment: low beams,

welcome lights, High-beam Assistant

7 Instrument lighting

Parking lights/low beams,

headlight control

General information

Position of switch:

, ,

If the driver door is opened with the ignition

switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐

cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lights

Position of switch : the vehicle's lights

light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.

Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐

riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery

and it would then be impossible to start the en‐

gine.

When parking, it is preferable to switch on the

one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to

page 104.

Low beams

Position of switch with the ignition

switched on: the low beams light up.

Welcome lights

When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in

position or : the parking and interior

lights light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐

locked.

Activating/deactivating

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Welcome lights"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Seite 103

Lights Controls

103

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while after

the radio-ready state is switched off if the

lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is

switched on.

Setting the duration

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Pathway lighting:"

4. Set length of time.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Automatic headlight control

Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐

vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in

twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator

lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When emerging from a tunnel during the day,

the low beams are not switched off immedi‐

ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can

cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams always stay on when the fog

lights are activated.

Personal responsibility

The automatic headlight control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐

ment in determining when to turn the lights on

in response to ambient lighting conditions.

E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or

hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under

these conditions, you should always switch on

the lights manually.◀

Daytime running lights

With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐

ning lights light up in position , or

. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐

ing lights light up in position .

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are

mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐

vate the daytime running lights.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Roadside parking lights

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With the ignition switched off, press the lever

either up or down past the resistance point for

approx. 2 seconds.

Switch off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in

the opposite direction.

Adaptive Light Control

The concept

Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight

control system that enables dynamic illumina‐

tion of the road surface.

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐

rameters, the light from the headlight follows

the course of the road.

Seite 104

Controls Lights

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or

when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating

lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of

the curve when the vehicle is moving below a

certain speed.

Activating

Position of switch with the ignition

switched on.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐

tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐

er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

The turning lights are automatically switched

on depending on the steering angle or the use

of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the turning lights may

be automatically switched on regardless of the

steering angle.

Self-leveling headlights

The self-leveling headlights compensate for

acceleration and braking operations in order

not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve

optimum illumination of the roadway.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has

failed. Have the system checked as soon as

possible.

High-beam Assistant

The concept

When the low beams are activated, this system

automatically switches the high beams on and

off or suppresses the light in the areas that

blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐

trolled by a camera on the front of the interior

rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the

high beams are activated whenever the traffic

situation allows. The driver can intervene at

any time and switch the high beams non and

off as usual.

Note

Personal responsibility

The High-beam Assistant cannot serve

as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐

ment of when to use the high beams. There‐

fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐

tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀

Activating

Depending on the equipment, turn the light

switch into position or .

2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐

row.

The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐

tomatically brightened or dimmed.

The system responds to light from oncoming

traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to

adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐

ment cluster lights up when the system

switches on the high beams. Depend‐

ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,

the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐

ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the

areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,

the blue indicator light will stay on.

Seite 105

Lights Controls

105

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Switching the high beams on and off

manually

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off

when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐

vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐

ton on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The system is not fully functional in situations

such as the following, and driver intervention

may be necessary:

▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.

▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders

and wagons; when driving close to train or

ship traffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐

sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐

coming traffic on freeways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the

presence of highly reflective signs.

▷ At low speeds.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐

ered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

The parking lights or low beams must be

switched on.

Press button. The green indicator

lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 104, is activated, the low beams will

come on automatically when you switch on the

front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are

activated, the front fog lights are not switched

on.

Instrument lighting

Adjusting

The parking lights or low beams

must be switched on to adjust

the brightness.

Adjust the brightness with the

thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights

and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐

cally.

Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐

trols brightness of some of these features.

Seite 106

Controls Lights

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Overview

1 Interior lights

2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and off

Press button.

To reel off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.

Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights

Press button.

Reading lights are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lights.

Bang & Olufsen High End Surround

Sound System

Adjusting speaker lighting

Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.

The lighting can be individually set.

"Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "B&O"

4. Select the desired lighting setting.

▷ "Off": no lighting.

▷ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of

view are faded while driving.

▷ "On": the speakers are always illumi‐

nated.

Ambient light

Depending on the equipment, the lighting can

be individually adjusted in the interior for some

lights.

Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Ambient:"

4. Select desired setting.

With a color scheme selected and welcome

lights activated they illuminate in the line's

color when vehicle is unlocked.

Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐

justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument

lighting or on the Control Display.

"Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Brightness:"

4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 107

Lights Controls

107

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbags

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front

passenger by responding to frontal impacts in

which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐

equate restraint.

Side airbags

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the

side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags

In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports

the head.

Seite 108

Controls Safety

108

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal

impact.

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐

tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end

collisions.

Information on how to ensure the optimal

protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.

▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at

the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to

keep the risk of injury to your hands or

arms as low as possible when the airbag is

triggered.

▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐

jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on

the front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front

passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐

tach adhesive labels or coverings and do

not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS

devices or' mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐

ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and

legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries

might occur when front airbag is activated.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or

other objects on the front passenger seat

that are not approved specifically for seats

with integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as

jackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads

away from the side airbag and do not rest

against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries

might occur when airbag is activated.

▷ Do not remove the airbag system.

▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.

▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, do not cover them or

modify them in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

nents or the wiring in the airbag system.

This also applies to steering wheel covers,

the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars

and the sides of the roofliner.◀

Even when you follow all instructions very

closely, injury from contact with the airbags

cannot be ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to

short-term and, in most cases, temporary

hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐

ploying the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐

diately after the system has been triggered;

otherwise, you may risk burns.

Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐

mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by

the service center or an authorized repair shop

for handling explosives.

Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐

tem could lead to failure in an emergency or

unintentional activation of the airbag - both

may lead to injury.◀

Warnings and information on the airbags are

also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag

system

When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐

ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights

up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐

erational readiness of the entire airbag system

and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on.

▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Seite 109

Safety Controls

109

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐

tem checked immediately.

In case of a malfunction have airbag system

checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk

that the system does not function as expected

in case of a severe accident.◀

Automatic deactivation of the front-

seat passenger airbags

The system reads if the front passenger seat is

occupied by measuring the human body's re‐

sistance.

Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐

senger's side are either activated or deacti‐

vated.

Leave feet in the footwell

Make sure that the front passenger

keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,

proper functioning of the front passenger air‐

bag might not be assured.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the front

passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front pas‐

senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐

structions for children on the front passenger

seat, see Children.◀

Malfunction of the automatic

deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults,

the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐

tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,

the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger

airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that

the front-seat passenger airbags are activated

and the indicator lamp goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have

the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied

seat cushion

▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

or other items to the front passenger seat

unless they are specifically recommended

by your vehicle's manufacturer.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the

passenger seat if a child restraint system is

to be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat that

could press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seat

passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐

ger airbags indicates the operating state of the

front-seat passenger airbags.

The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐

ther activated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights up

when a child is properly

seated in a child restraint fix‐

ing system or when the seat

is empty. The airbags on the

front passenger side are not

activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,

e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient

size is detected on the seat. The airbags

on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seats

The system generally detects children seated

in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐

quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐

Seite 110

Controls Safety

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

factured. After installing a child seat, make

sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat

passenger airbags lights up. This indicates

that the child seat has been detected and the

front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat

passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/

front passenger's airbags very much depends

on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐

er's seat.

With a respective message appearing on Con‐

trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep

the accuracy of this function over the long-

term.

Calibrating the front seats

A corresponding message appears on the

Control Display.

Press the reel and move the respective

seat all the way forward.

2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still

moves forward slightly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

The calibration procedure is completed when

the message on the Control Display disap‐

pears.

If the message continues to be displayed, re‐

peat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a re‐

peat calibration, have the system checked as

soon as possible.

Unobstructed area of movement

Ensure that the area of movement of the

seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury

or damage to objects.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in

the four mounted tires. The system warns you

if there is a significant loss of pressure in one

or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the

tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure

and tire temperature.

Hints

Tire damage due to external factors

Sudden tire damage caused by external

circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐

vance.◀

With use of the system observe further infor‐

mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐

fer to page 211.

Functional requirements

The system must have been reset with the

correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐

ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is

not assured.

Reset the system after each adjustment of the

tire inflation pressure and after every tire or

wheel change.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to

ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display

The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐

play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

Seite 111

Safety Controls

111

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Status control display

Tire and system status are indicated by the

color of the wheels and a text message on the

Control Display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning rela‐

tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during

the last reset.

One wheel is yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in

the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in

several tires.

Wheels, gray

The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons

for this may be:

▷ The system is being reset.

▷ Malfunction.

Status information

The status control display additionally shows

the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐

pending on the model, tire temperatures. It

shows the actual values read; they may vary

depending on driving style or weather condi‐

tions.

Carry out reset

Reset the system after each adjustment of the

tire inflation pressure and after every tire or

wheel change.

On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Perform reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive off.

5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform

reset".

6. Drive away.

The tires are shown in gray and the status is

displayed.

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a

short period, the set tire inflation pressures are

accepted as reference values. The reset is

completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed Reset, the

wheels on the Control Display are shown in

green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

active" is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When

you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A

Check Control message is displayed.

▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.

▷ No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warning

based on the tire inflation pressures before

the last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐

beled with a circular symbol containing the

letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat

tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving

may result in serious accidents.◀

A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC

Dynamic Stability Control.

Seite 112

Controls Safety

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all

four tires.

The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 224, can possibly be

used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires

is shown to be correct, it is possible that

the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform

a reset. Then perform the reset.

If an identification is not possible, please

contact the service center.

Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the

Mobility System.

Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,

may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In

this case, have the electronics checked at the

next opportunity and have them replaced if

needed.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire

at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires

is shown to be correct, it is possible that

the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform

a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of

tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire

inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐

ing style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible

driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐

ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during

braking, a longer braking distance and different

self-steering properties. Adjust your driving

style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐

neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,

potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance de‐

pends on how the vehicle is used during the

trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐

ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐

ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Your car handles differently when you lose tire

inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐

duced when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change.◀

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce

speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire

could come loose and cause an accident. Do

not continue driving and contact your service

center.◀

Required tire inflation pressure check

message

A Check Control message is displayed in the

following situations

▷ The system has detected a wheel change,

but no reset was done.

▷ Inflation was not carried out according to

specifications.

Seite 113

Safety Controls

113

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below

the level of the last confirmation.

In this case:

▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.

▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire

change.

System limits

The system does not function properly if a re‐

set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is

reported though tire inflation pressures are

correct.

The tire inflation pressure depends on the

tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the

sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus

increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire

inflation pressure is reduced when the tire

temperature falls again. These circumstances

may cause a warning when temperatures fall

very sharply.

Malfunction

The yellow warning lamp flashes and

then lights up continuously. A Check

Control message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐

tected.

Display in the following situations:

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:

have the service center check it if needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by

your service center.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.

▷ Interference through systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: after leav‐

ing the area of the interference, the system

automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/

FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)

should be checked monthly when cold and in‐

flated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐

ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please

note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also

been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐

cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐

ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐

tor is combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐

tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illumi‐

nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐

sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐

function exists. When the malfunction indicator

is illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace‐

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

Seite 114

Controls Safety

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐

tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels

on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement

or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

The concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure loss

on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐

tween the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the

diameter and therefore the rotational speed of

the corresponding wheel changes. This will be

detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual infla‐

tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The system must have been initialized when

the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐

wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐

sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐

tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.

Status display

The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can

be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,

whether or not the FTM is active.

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

The status is displayed.

Initialization

When initializing the once set inflation tire

pressures serve as reference values in order to

detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐

firming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with

snow chains.

On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Perform reset"

4. Start the engine - do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".

6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving,

which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when

driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A

Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐

beled with a circular symbol containing the

letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat

tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving

may result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐

bility Control is switched on if needed.

Seite 115

Safety Controls

115

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

System limits

Sudden tire damage

Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external circumstances cannot be recognized

in advance.◀

A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all

four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,

check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in

the following situations:

▷ When the system has not been initialized.

▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.

▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction

wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all

four tires.

The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 224, can possibly be

used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires

is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not

have been initialized. In this case, initialize

the system.

If an identification is not possible, please

contact the service center.

Fix the flat tire where applicable using the

Mobility System, refer to page 224.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire

at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires

is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not

have been initialized. In this case, initialize

the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of

tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire

inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐

ing style and road conditions.

A vehicle with an average load has a possible

driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.

A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐

ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during

braking, a longer braking distance and different

self-steering properties. Adjust your driving

style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐

neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,

potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance de‐

pends on how the vehicle is used during the

trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐

ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐

ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Your car handles differently when you lose tire

inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐

duced when braking, braking distances are

longer and the self-steering properties will

change.◀

Seite 116

Controls Safety

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce

speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire

could come loose and cause an accident. Do

not continue driving and contact your service

center.◀

Intelligent Safety

The concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of

the driver assistance system.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐

telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐

tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐

sion. These systems are active automatically

every time the engine is started using the

Start/Stop button:

▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to

page 118.

▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 123.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the

traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐

cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐

dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system

do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to

adapt his or her driving speed and style to the

traffic conditions.◀

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late or

improperly. Therefore, always be alert and

ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk

of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐

tions of the individual braking systems might

lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐

cally active after every departure.

Seite 117

Safety Controls

117

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Press button: the systems are turned

off. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. The

LED lights up.

Settings can be made on the Control Display.

Front-end collision warning

Depending on the equipment, the collision

warning system consists of one of the two sys‐

tems:

▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐

ing function, refer to page 118.

▷ Front-end collision warning with braking

function, refer to page 120

Front-end collision warning

with City Braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an

accident cannot be prevented, the system will

help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐

nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐

ently if needed.

The automatic braking intervention is done

with limited force and duration.

A camera in the area of the rearview mirror

controls the system.

The front-end collision warning is available

even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle

intentionally the collision warning is delayed

avoiding false alarm.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an imminent

danger of collision at speeds from approx.

3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with

the current driving situation.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to

35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the

traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐

cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐

dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system

do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to

adapt his or her driving speed and style to the

traffic conditions.◀

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late or

improperly. Therefore, always be alert and

ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk

of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐

tions of the individual braking systems might

lead to accidents.◀

Seite 118

Controls Safety

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every

driving-off.

Switch off

Press button: the system is switched

off. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.

The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"

2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"

3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.

The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐

rently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐

nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐

ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐

ing.

Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐

ing.

You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneu‐

ver.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the

impending danger of a collision or the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there

is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision

when the vehicle approaches another object at

a relatively high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there

is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is

assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐

vention in a possible risk of collision.

Seite 119

Safety Controls

119

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Acute warnings can also be triggered without

previous prewarning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself

to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐

ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐

ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on

the brake pedal. The system can assist with

some braking intervention if there is risk of a

collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus

come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐

vention up to a complete stop, the engine may

be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on

and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐

vated.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by

stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐

tively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations

of the detection range and functional restric‐

tions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐

sued late.

E. g. the following situations may not be de‐

tected:

▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.

▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the

following situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.

▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.

▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment

version, the field of view of the camera in

the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐

scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐

cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun

low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are,

e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are

displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐

cess of false warnings.

Front-end collision warning

with braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an

accident cannot be prevented, the system will

help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an immi‐

nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐

ently if needed.

The automatic braking intervention may be

executed with maximum braking force and for

a brief period only as necessary.

If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise

Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision

Seite 120

Controls Safety

120

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐

dar sensor in conjunction with a camera.

The front-end collision warning is available

even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle

intentionally the collision warning is delayed

avoiding false alarm.

General information

The system issues a two-phase warning of a

possible danger of collision with vehicles at

speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of

warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐

uation.

Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the

traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐

cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐

dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system

do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to

adapt his or her driving speed and style to the

traffic conditions.◀

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late or

improperly. Therefore, always be alert and

ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk

of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐

tions of the individual braking systems might

lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Radar sensor

The radar sensor is located in the lower area of

the front bumper.

Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐

structed.

Seite 121

Safety Controls

121

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every

driving-off.

Switch off

Press button: the system is switched

off. The LED goes out.

Re-press button: the system is switched on.

The LED lights up.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.

"Settings"

2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"

3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.

The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐

rently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐

nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐

ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐

ing.

Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐

ing.

You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneu‐

ver.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the

impending danger of a collision or the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there

is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function

Warning of the imminent danger of a collision

when the vehicle approaches another object at

a relatively high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there

is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is

assisted by an automatic braking intervention

in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without

previous prewarning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself

to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐

ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐

ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on

the brake pedal. The system can assist with

automatic braking intervention if there is risk of

Seite 122

Controls Safety

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐

cle to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐

vention up to a complete stop, the engine may

be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on

and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐

vated.

Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking

intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.

No automatic delay occurs.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by

stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐

tively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations

of the detection range and functional restric‐

tions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐

sued late.

E. g. the following situations may not be de‐

tected:

▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.

▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.

▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the

following situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.

▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.

▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment

version, the field of view of the camera in

the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐

scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐

cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun

low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are,

e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are

displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐

cess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warning

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the

function warns of an imminent collision with

pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.

The function is subdivided into the following

systems:

▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with

city braking function, refer to page 123

▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 126

Pedestrian warning with city

braking function

The concept

The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐

destrians.

The system issues a warning in the city driving

speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐

lision with pedestrians and includes a braking

function.

The camera in the area of the rearview mirror

controls the system.

Seite 123

Safety Controls

123

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

General information

In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐

sions with pedestrians at speeds from about

6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h

shortly before a collision the system supports

you with a braking intervention.

Under those circumstances it reacts to people

who are within the detection range of the sys‐

tem.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas.

▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.

▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐

cated within the central area. A warning is is‐

sued about pedestrians who are located within

the extended area only if they are moving in

the direction of the central area.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the

traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐

cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐

dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system

do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to

adapt his or her driving speed and style to the

traffic conditions.◀

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may

be not issued at all, or may be issued late or

improperly. Therefore, always be alert and

ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk

of an accident.◀

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐

tions of the individual braking systems might

lead to accidents.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Seite 124

Controls Safety

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every

driving-off.

Switch off

Press button: the systems are turned

off. The LED goes out.

Press button: the systems are turned on. The

LED lights up.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way

is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the

instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐

nal sounds.

With instrument display: The red sym‐

bol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an

evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself

to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐

ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐

ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on

the brake pedal. The system can assist with

some braking intervention if there is risk of a

collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus

come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐

vention up to a complete stop, the engine may

be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on

and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐

vated.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by

stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐

tively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Limitations

of the detection range and functional restric‐

tions are to be considered.

System limits

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is lim‐

ited.

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐

sued late.

E. g. the following situations may not be de‐

tected:

▷ Partially covered pedestrians.

▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour.

▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.

▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may

not be available in the following situations:

Seite 125

Safety Controls

125

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.

▷ In tight curves.

▷ If the driving stability control systems are

deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.

▷ If the camera viewing field or the front

windshield are dirty or covered.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop knob.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐

cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun

low in the sky.

▷ When it is dark outside.

Night Vision with Pedestrian

and Animal Detection

The concept

Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐

tion is a night vision system.

An infrared camera scans the area in front of

the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects

pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm

objects that are similar in shape to human be‐

ings or animals are detected by the system. If

necessary, the heat image can be displayed on

the Control Display.

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objects

in the field of view of the camera.

Warm objects have a light appearance and

cold objects, a dark appearance.

The ability to detect an object depends on the

temperature difference between the object

and the background and on the level of heat

radiation emitted by the object. Objects that

are similar in temperature to the environment

or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐

tect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speeds

above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐

ent light, the image is only displayed when the

low beams are activated.

A still image is displayed at regular intervals for

a fraction of a second.

Pedestrian and animal detection

Object detection and warning only functions in

darkness.

Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐

man beings are detected by the system.

In addition, the system also detects animals

above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.

With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐

play:

People detected by the system are displayed

with a slight yellow hue.

Animals detected by the system are displayed

in a darker yellow.

Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐

tection operates within the following distance

ranges:

Seite 126

Controls Safety

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.

330 ft/100 m

▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.

490 ft/150 m

▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐

prox. 230 ft/70 m

Environmental influences can limit the availa‐

bility of object detection.

If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is

located in a residential area, the animal detec‐

tion is temporarily switched off.

Hints

Personal responsibility

Night Vision cannot replace the driver's

personal judgment of the visibility conditions

and the traffic situation. The view ahead and

the actual visibility conditions must always be

the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐

justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road

safety.◀

Overview

Buttons in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switch on/switch off heat image

Camera

The camera is automatically heated when the

external temperatures are low.

The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐

gether with the headlights.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐

ically active after every driving-off.

Switch off

The system is only switched off until the next

time the engine is started with the Start/Stop

button.

Press button.

The LED goes out.

Switching on heat image additionally

The heat image from the Night Vision camera

can also be displayed on the Control Display.

This function has no effect on object detec‐

tion.

Press button.

The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.

Seite 127

Safety Controls

127

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Adjustments via the iDrive

With heat image switched on:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select brightness or contrast.

▷ Select the symbol.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Display

Warning of people or animals in

danger

If a collision with a person or an animal de‐

tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐

bol appears on the instrument cluster and in

the Head-up Display.

Although both the shape and the heat radiation

are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled

out.

Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area for the pedestrian warning

consists of two parts:

▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.

▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.

With animal warnings, no distinction is made

between the central or expanded area.

The entire area moves along with the vehicle in

the direction of the steering angle and changes

with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed

increases, the area becomes longer and wider,

e.g.

Prewarning

The yellow symbol is displayed when a

person is detected in the central area

immediately in front of the vehicle.

The yellow symbol is displayed when a person

in the extended area is moving from the right

or left towards the central area.

The displayed symbol can vary with the people

detected.

Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐

sive maneuver.

When animals are detected, an animal

symbol is displayed. The symbol also

shows the side of the road on which

the animal was detected. Intervene actively by

braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Acute warning

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐

nal sounds.

With instrument display: The red sym‐

bol is displayed and a signal sounds.

When animals are detected, an red animal

symbol is displayed with the signal tone.

Red symbol in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol in the instrument display.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an

evasive maneuver.

Seite 128

Controls Safety

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Display in the Head-up Display

The warning is displayed simultane‐

ously in the Head-up Display and on

the instrument cluster. The displayed

symbol can vary with the people detected.

When animals are detected, an animal symbol

is displayed.

System limits

Basic limits

System operation is limited in situations such

as the following:

▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves.

▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged.

▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

▷ At very high external temperatures.

Limits of pedestrian and animal

detection

In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐

trians are detected as animals or animals as

pedestrians.

Small animals are not detected by the object

detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐

ble in the image.

Limited detection:

▷ People or animals who are fully or partially

covered, especially when their heads are

covered.

▷ People who are not in an upright position,

e.g., lying down.

▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,

recumbent bicycles).

▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,

after an accident.

No display on the rear screen

The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐

played on the rear screen.

Lane departure warning

The concept

Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts

you when the vehicle on streets with lane

markings is about to leave the lane. This

speed, depending on the country version, is

between 35 mph/55 km/h and

45 mph/70 km/h.

When switching on the system below this

speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster.

The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in

the event of warnings. The time of the warning

may vary depending on the current driving sit‐

uation.

The system does not provide a warning if the

turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system cannot serve as a substitute

for the driver's personal judgment of the

course of the road and the traffic situation.

In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐

ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐

cle.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Lane departure warning

Seite 129

Safety Controls

129

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Display in the instrument cluster

▷ Lines: system is activated.

▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can be

issued.

Display in the instrument display

▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐

vated.

▷ Symbol green: at least one lane

marking was detected and warn‐

ings can be issued.

Issued warning

If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has

been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐

brating.

If the turn signal is set before changing the

lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning

The warning ends:

▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.

▷ When returning to your own lane.

▷ When braking hard.

▷ When using the turn signal.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional in the

following situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐

ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane

markings such as in construction areas.

▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,

ice, dirt or water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

▷ When the lane markings are covered by

objects.

▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.

▷ When driving toward bright lights.

▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐

ered with stickers, etc.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

Seite 130

Controls Safety

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Active Blind Spot Detection

The concept

Two radar sensors below the rear bumper

monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle

at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.

The system indicates whether there are vehi‐

cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching

from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.

The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐

med.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐

uations described above.

The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes

and the steering wheel vibrates.

Hints

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substi‐

tute for the driver's personal judgment of the

traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐

cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐

dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Active Blind Spot Detection

Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located under the rear

bumper.

Switching on/off

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Seite 131

Safety Controls

131

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Display

Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

Information stage

The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐

ing indicates when there are vehicles in the

blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning

If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the

critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly

and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing

flashes brightly.

The warning stops when the turn signal is

switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the

critical zone.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional in the

following situations:

▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.

▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers.

A Check Control message is displayed when

the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐

erned by the following:

FCC ID:

▷ NBG009014A.

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and

▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

these devices could void the user's authority to

operate this equipment.

Brake force display

The concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outer

brake lights light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the inner

brake lights light up in addition.

Active Protection

General information

The Active Protection safety package consists

of systems that are independent of each other:

▷ Attentiveness assistant.

Seite 132

Controls Safety

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ PreCrash

▷ PostCrash

Attentiveness assistant

The concept

The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐

ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐

notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this

situation, it is recommended that the driver

takes a break.

Note

Personal responsibility

The system cannot act as a substitute for

the personal assessment of one's physical

state and may not detect an increasing lack of

alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐

rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is

rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐

tected too late and an accident be caused as a

result.◀

Function

The system is activated each time the engine

is started and cannot be switched off.

After travel has begun, the system is trained

about the driver, so that increasing lack of

alertness or fatigue can be detected.

This procedure takes the following criteria into

account:

▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐

ior.

▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.

Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the

system is active and can display a recommen‐

dation to take a break.

Break recommendation

If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or

fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control

Display with the recommendation to take a

break.

A recommendation to take a break is displayed

only once during an uninterrupted trip.

After a break, another recommendation to take

a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐

mately 45 minutes.

System limits

The function may be limited in the following

situations, for instance, and will either output

an incorrect warning or no warning at all:

▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h.

▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during

rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.

▷ In active driving situations, such as when

changing lanes frequently.

▷ When the road surface is poor.

▷ In the event of strong side winds.

PreCrash

The concept

With this system critical driving situations that

might result in an accident can be detected

above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In

these situations, preventive measures are au‐

tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐

cident as much as possible.

Critical driving situations may include:

▷ Emergency stop.

▷ Severe understeering.

▷ Severe oversteering.

If the vehicle includes the front-end collision

warning or front-end collision warning with

braking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐

cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you

can also be detected within the system's

range.

Seite 133

Safety Controls

133

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Note

Personal responsibility

The system cannot possibly serve as a

substitute for the driver's personal judgment of

the traffic situation. The system may not al‐

ways detect critical situations reliably and in a

timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation

and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may

result.◀

Function

After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts

are automatically pretensioned once after the

vehicle is driven is away.

In critical driving situations, the following indi‐

vidual functions become active as needed:

▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐

sioned.

▷ Automatic closing of the windows.

▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.

▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:

automatic positioning of the backrest for

the front passenger seat.

After a critical driving situation without an acci‐

dent, the front belts are loosened again. All

other systems can be restored to the desired

setting.

If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐

cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt

using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the

belt before continuing on your trip.

PostCrash

In the event of an accident, the system can

bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐

tervention by the driver in certain situations.

This can reduce the risk of a further collision

and the consequences thereof.

Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐

hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic

braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐

terrupts automatic braking.

After coming to a halt, the brake is released

automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐

ing.

Seite 134

Controls Safety

134

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Antilock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during

braking.

The vehicle contains its steering power even

during full brake applications, thus increasing

active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the en‐

gine.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system

automatically produces the greatest possible

braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐

tance to a minimum during emergency stop.

This system utilizes all of the benefits provided

by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal

for the duration of the emergency stop.

Adaptive brake assistant

In combination with the Active Cruise Control,

this system ensures that the brakes respond

even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐

uations.

Drive-off assistant

This system supports driving off on inclines.

The parking brake is not required.

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐

out delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is

held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer

is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Driving off without delay

After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant

will not hold the vehicle in place for more than

approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to

roll back.◀

DSC Dynamic Stability

Control

The concept

DSC prevents traction loss in the power

wheels when driving off and accelerating.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐

tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within

the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐

cle on a steady course by reducing engine

speed and by applying brakes to the individual

wheels.

Note

Adjust your driving style to the situation

An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not

even with DSC.

Seite 135

Driving stability control systems Controls

135

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety

margin by driving in a risky manner.◀

Do not deactivate DSC when driving with

roof load

Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control

DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof-

mounted luggage rack.

Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐

ing-critical situation due to the elevated center

of gravity.◀

Overview

Button in the vehicle

DSC OFF button

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐

trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is

reduced during acceleration and when driving

in curves.

Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active

Steering system are only performed by the

rear axle steering.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC

again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not lon‐

ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐

strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

The DSC system is switched off.

The steering and, depending on the equip‐

ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

Activating DSC

Press button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐

played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is

deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction

Control

The concept

The DTC system is a version of the DSC where

forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum headway on

special road conditions or loose road surfaces,

e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐

what limited driving stability.

Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC

provides maximum traction. Driving stability is

limited during acceleration and when driving in

curves.

Therefore drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC

under the following special circumstances:

▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.

Seite 136

Controls Driving stability control systems

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or

driving off from loose grounds.

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic

Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC

OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐

tor lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lights

If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in

the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐

namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrive

xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐

hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC

further optimize traction and driving dynamics.

The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐

tributes the drive forces to the front and rear

axles as demanded by the driving situation and

road surface.

HDC Hill Descent Control

The concept

HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐

matically controls vehicle speed on steep

downhill gradients. Without applying the

brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than

walking speed.

Hill Descent Control can be activated at

speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When

driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed

to approx. walking speed and then keeps its

speed constant.

As long as there is active braking, the system

is on standby. The system does not brake the

vehicle during this time.

Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever

position D or R.

Increasing or decreasing vehicle

speed

Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐

prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h

using the rocker switch of the cruise control on

the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be

changed by lightly accelerating.

▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of

resistance: the speed increases gradually.

▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point

of resistance: the speed increases while

the rocker switch is pressed.

▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point

of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐

ally.

▷ Press the rocker switch down past the

point of resistance: when driving forward,

the speed decreases to approx.

6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed

decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.

Seite 137

Driving stability control systems Controls

137

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Activating HDC

Press button; the LED above the button

lights up.

Deactivating HDC

Press button again and the LED goes

out. HDC is automatically deactivated

above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Display in the instrument cluster

The selected speed is displayed

in the speedometer.

▷ Green: the system is actively

braking the vehicle.

▷ Orange: the system is on

standby.

Malfunction

A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐

ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated

brake temperatures.

Adaptive Drive

The concept

Adaptive Drive includes the following systems:

▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 138.

▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to

page 138.

The system increases driving stability and driv‐

ing comfort.

Dynamic Drive

The concept

The system reduces the lateral inclination of

the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in

curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.

Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐

creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐

tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front

and rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐

ing situations.

Programs

The system offers two different programs.

Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics

Control, refer to page 139.

SPORT

Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.

COMFORT

Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.

Dynamic Damping Control

The concept

This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐

tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐

eling on uneven road surfaces.

The system enhances driving dynamics and

comfort fitting road surface and driving style.

Programs

The system offers several different programs.

Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics

Control, refer to page 139.

SPORT/SPORT+

Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐

sorbers for greater driving agility.

Seite 138

Controls Driving stability control systems

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

COMFORT/ECO PRO

Balanced tuning.

COMFORT+

Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐

ers for optimal traveling comfort.

Integral Active Steering

The concept

Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐

tive Steering and rear axle steering.

Active Steering varies the steering angle of the

wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐

ment as a function of the speed.

At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g.,

in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e.,

steering becomes more direct.

The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐

verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in

a direction opposite to the front wheels.

At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐

ingly reduced.

The rear wheels are turned to the same angle

as the front wheels.

In critical situations, Integral Active Steering

can specifically steer the front and rear wheels

to stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter‐

venes, e.g., when braking where road condi‐

tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve‐

hicle.

Initializing

In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐

alize the Integral Active Steering.

The warning lamp lights up. A Check

Control message is displayed.

With the engine running, turn the steering

wheel all the way to the left and right sev‐

eral times in a uniform manner until the

warning lamp disappears.

2. Have the system checked if the warning

lamp does not go out after moving the

steering wheel approx. 6 times or if the

steering wheel is at an angle.

Using snow chains

Note

When snow chains are in use, refer to

page 228, rear wheel steering is deactivated.

Programs

The system offers several different programs.

Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics

Control, refer to page 139.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac‐

tive Steering for greater driving agility.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, the steering

wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle

responds more sensitively to steering wheel

movements in the higher speed range.

The stability-enhancing intervention may be

deactivated.

Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.

Have the system checked.

Driving Dynamics Control

The concept

The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to

adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For

this purpose various programs are available for

selection that are activated via the two buttons

of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC

OFF-button.

Seite 139

Driving stability control systems Controls

139

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Operating the programs

Press button Program

DSC OFF

TRACTION

SPORT+

SPORT

COMFORT

COMFORT+

ECO PRO

Automatic program change

The system may automatically switch to COM‐

FORT in the following situations:

▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering.

▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.

▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.

▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFF

When DSC OFF, refer to page 136, is active,

driving stability is limited during acceleration

and when driving in curves.

TRACTION

When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has

maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC

Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 137, is

activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐

celeration and when driving in curves.

SPORT+

Sporty driving with optimized suspension and

adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐

bilization.

Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.

The driver handles several of the stabilization

tasks.

Activating SPORT+

Press button repeatedly until SPORT+

appears in the instrument cluster and

the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program change

When switching on the adjustable speed limit

or activating cruise control, the program auto‐

matically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lights

SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:

Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension

and engine control for greater driving agility

with maximum driving stabilization.

The program can be configured to individual

specifications.

The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐

rently in use.

Seite 140

Controls Driving stability control systems

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Activating SPORT

Press button repeatedly until SPORT

is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

When the display is activated on the Control

Display, refer to page 142, the SPORT driving

mode can be set.

After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐

lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed

panel and configure the program.

SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐

vated:

"Settings"

2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode"

3. Configure driving mode.

This configuration is retrieved when the

SPORT driving mode is activated.

COMFORT

For a balanced tuning with maximum driving

stabilization.

Activating COMFORT

Press button repeatedly until COM‐

FORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

In certain situations, the system automatically

changes to the NORMAL program, automatic

program change, refer to page 140.

COMFORT+

Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐

ers and adapted engine control for optimal

traveling comfort with maximum driving stabili‐

zation.

COMFORT+ activation

Press button repeatedly until COM‐

FORT+ is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

ECO PRO

ECO PRO, refer to page 196, provides consis‐

tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for

maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐

zation.

Comfort functions and the engine controller

are adjusted.

The program can be configured to individual

specifications.

Activating ECO PRO

Press button repeatedly until ECO

PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Activate ECO PRO.

2. "Configure ECO PRO"

Make the desired settings.

Configure driving mode

Settings can be made for the following driving

modes in Driving mode:

▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 141.

▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 197.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays

the selected program.

Program selection

Pressing the button displays a

list of the selectable programs.

Depending on your vehicle's op‐

tional features, the list in the in‐

strument cluster can differ from

the illustration shown.

Seite 141

Driving stability control systems Controls

141

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Display on the Control Display

Program changes can be displayed briefly on

the Control Display.

To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings"

2. "Driving mode"

3. "Driving mode info"

Seite 142

Controls Driving stability control systems

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go function, ACC

The concept

Use this system to select a desired speed that

the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear

roads.

To the extent possible, the system automati‐

cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle

ahead of you.

The distance that the vehicle maintains to the

vehicle ahead of you can be varied.

For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.

To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐

tomatically reduces the speed, applies the

brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐

cle ahead begins moving faster.

If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and

then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐

riod, the system is able to detect this within the

given system limits. Your own vehicle will

brake automatically and then accelerate again.

If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again

after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐

celerator pedal or press the appropriate button

to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐

matically accelerate.

As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐

erates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained downhill, but

may not be maintained uphill if engine power is

insufficient.

General information

Depending on the driving settings, the features

of the cruise control can change in certain

areas.

Hints

Personal responsibility

Even an active system holds the driver

responsible for his or her driving, particularly

for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed,

keeping your distance and for your driving

style all in relation to traffic.

Technically the system has its limits, it cannot

independently react to all traffic situations.

Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe

the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and

react when needed, e.g. through braking,

steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of

accident.◀

Unfavorable weather conditions

In the event of unfavorable weather and

light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall,

slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer

recognition of vehicles as well as short-term

interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐

tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐

rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when

necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making

an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the

risk of an accident.◀

Seite 143

Driving comfort Controls

143

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it

against moving on its own.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐

ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the

Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐

wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press but‐

ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,

refer to page 144

Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 145

Resume speed, refer to

page 146

Reduce distance, refer to

page 146

Increase distance, refer to

page 146

rocker switch:

Maintain, store, change speed,

refer to page 145

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's

series, optional features and country specifica‐

tions.

Radar sensor

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper

for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the

vehicle.

A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐

tection of vehicles.

▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐

move layers of snow and ice carefully.

▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar

sensor.

Camera

The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

A dirty or covered area in front of the interior

mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles.

If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐

rior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue in

the winter.

Switching on/off and interrupting

cruise control

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

Seite 144

Controls Driving comfort

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster

light up and the mark in the speedometer is set

to the current speed.

Cruise control can be used.

Switch off

Deactivated or interrupted system

With deactivated or interrupted system

use your brakes, steering and moves as usual

to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

To switch off the system while standing, step

on brake pedal at the same time.

Press button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed

is deleted.

Interrupting

Press button on the steering wheel.

If interrupting the system while stationary,

press on the brake pedal at the same time.

The system is automatically interrupted in the

following situations:

▷ When the brakes are applied.

▷ When the clutch pedal is depressed.

▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐

gaged.

▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is

activated or DSC is deactivated.

▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.

▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are

opened while the vehicle is standing still.

▷ If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, e.g., on a road with

very little traffic without curb or shoulder

markings.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐

rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog.

Maintaining, storing, and changing the

speed

Hints

Adjusting the desired speed

Modify desired speed to road conditions

and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,

there is the risk of an accident.◀

Differences in speed

Large differences in speed relative to

other vehicles cannot be compensated by the

system such as in the following situations:

▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.

▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves

into the wrong lane.

▷ When stationary objects are approached at

high speed.◀

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐

terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the desired

speed.

Seite 145

Driving comfort Controls

145

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

This is displayed in the speedometer and

briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the

instrument cluster, refer to page 147.

When cruise control is maintained or stored,

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned

on if needed.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly

until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the

road is clear.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed

increases or decreases by approx.

1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed

past the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐

mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the

action.

Distance

Select a distance

Adjust the distance according to the traf‐

fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is

the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed

safety distance.◀

Reduce distance

Press button repeatedly until the de‐

sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐

tance, refer to page 147.

Increase distance

Press button repeatedly until the de‐

sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐

tance, refer to page 147.

Calling up the desired speed and

distance

While driving

Press button with the system

switched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed value

is deleted and cannot be called up again:

▷ When the system is switched off.

▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standing

The system brought the vehicle to a complete

standstill:

▷ Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically as

soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐

dar sensor moves off.

▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐

tomatic driving off.

To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐

matically, press the accelerator or press

the RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicate

that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐

sor has driven off.

Your vehicle was brought down to a halt

through stepping on the brake pedal and it is

standing behind another vehicle:

1. Press button to call up a stored

desired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.

3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the

RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead

of you drives away.

Seite 146

Controls Driving comfort

146

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed

▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.

▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has been

interrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system

is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is

displayed in the speedometer similarly

to the mark for the desired speed.

Brief status display

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check

Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐

tem requirements are currently not ready for

operations.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐

ing ahead of you.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set after the system is

switched on.

Distance display

The system has been interrupted or

distance control is temporarily sup‐

pressed because the accelerator

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle

was not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup‐

pressed because the accelerator

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle

was detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

away.

ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate

further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on

the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐

ton or rocker switch.

Indicator/warning lights

Personal responsibility

The indicator and warning lights do not

relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt

his or her desired driving speed and style to

the traffic conditions.◀

The vehicle symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead of

you.

The vehicle symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate for

the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the

brakes until you actively resume control by

pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds:

You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Seite 147

Driving comfort Controls

147

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐

played in the Head-up Display.

Distance information

The symbol is displayed when the dis‐

tance from the vehicle traveling ahead

is too short.

▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.

▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,

refer to page 101.

▷ Distance too short.

▷ Speed greater than approx.

40 mph/70 km/h.

System limits

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed

roads.

The minimum speed that can be set is

20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that

can be set depends on the vehicle.

The system can also be activated when sta‐

tionary.

Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐

uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection lidacity of the system and the

automatic braking lidacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not

be detected.

Limited detection potential

Because of the limited possible detec‐

tion, you should be alert at all times so that you

can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the

risk of an accident.◀

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate for:

▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road

users.

▷ Red traffic lights.

▷ Cross traffic.

▷ Oncoming traffic.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

until it is completely within the same lane as

your vehicle.

Swerving vehicles

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly

swerves into your lane, the system may not be

able to automatically restore the selected dis‐

tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐

ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,

when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐

hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,

the system requests that the driver intervene

by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐

vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐

wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀

Seite 148

Controls Driving comfort

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the

speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐

not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive

into a curve at an appropriate speed.

In tight curves the system offers only restricted

detection where a vehicle ahead of you might

be detected late or not at all.

When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to

the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐

ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐

ating.

After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐

activated and controls speed independently.

Driving away

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off

automatically; for example:

▷ On steep inclines.

▷ From behind bumps in the road.

In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

Radar sensor

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐

erned by the following:

FCC ID:

▷ OAYARS3-A

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and

▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

these devices could void the user's authority to

operate this equipment.

Malfunction

The system cannot be activated if the radar

sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be

caused by damage incurred during parking,

e.g.

A Check Control message is displayed if the

system fails.

The function for detecting and responding

when approaching stationary vehicles may be

limited in the following situations:

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle shipment.

▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A

Check Control message is displayed.

Seite 149

Driving comfort Controls

149

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Cruise control

The concept

The system maintains a preset speed via the

buttons on the steering wheel. The system

brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking

is insufficient.

General information

Depending on the driving settings, the features

of the cruise control can change in certain

areas.

Hints

Unfavorable conditions

Do not use the system if unfavorable

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐

stant speed, e.g.:

▷ On winding roads.

▷ In heavy traffic.

▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐

cle and cause an accident.◀

Controls

Overview

Press but‐

ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,

refer to page 150

Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 151

Resume speed, refer to

page 151

rocker switch:

Maintain, store, change speed,

refer to page 151

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's

series, optional features and country specifica‐

tions.

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the

current speed.

The cruise control can be used.

Switch off

Deactivated or interrupted system

With deactivated or interrupted system

use your brakes, steering and moves as usual

to avoid the chance of an accident.◀

Press button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed

is deleted.

Interrupting

When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:

▷ The brakes are applied.

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few

seconds or released while a gear is not en‐

gaged.

▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.

▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

or DSC is deactivated.

▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

▷ HDC is activated.

▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Seite 150

Controls Driving comfort

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Maintaining, storing, and changing the

speed

Hints

Adjusting the desired speed

Modify desired speed to road conditions

and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,

there is the risk of an accident.◀

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press button.

Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐

terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the desired

speed.

This is displayed, refer to page 151, in the

speedometer and briefly in the instrument

cluster.

When cruise control is maintained or stored,

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned

on if needed.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly

until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the

road is clear.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speed

increases or decreases by approx. 1mph/

km/

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed

past the point of resistance, the desired

speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐

mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set de‐

pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐

ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐

celerates the vehicle without requiring

pressure on the accelerator pedal.

After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐

hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the

switch beyond the resistance point causes

the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed

Press button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp

Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐

ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐

ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Desired speed

▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.

▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has been

interrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the system

is switched off.

With instrument display: the symbol is

displayed in the speedometer similarly

to the mark for the desired speed.

Seite 151

Driving comfort Controls

151

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Brief status display

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check

Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐

tem requirements are currently not ready for

operations.

Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐

played in the Head-up Display.

PDC Park Distance Control

The concept

PDC is a support when parking. When you

slowly approach an object in the rear - or also

in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐

ble - then the object is reported through:

▷ Signal tones.

▷ Visual display.

General information

Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure

the distances from objects.

The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐

stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.

6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given:

▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐

ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.

▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,

bicycle racks.

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and

maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Hints

Personal responsibility

Even an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility while

driving.

Technically the system has its limits, it cannot

independently react to all traffic situations.

Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe

the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and

react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Avoid driving fast with PDC

Avoid approaching an object too fast.

Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐

tive.

For technical reasons, the system may other‐

wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐

tion P R.

The rearview camera also switches on.

Seite 152

Controls Driving comfort

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Automatic deactivation during forward

travel

The system switches off when a certain driving

distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off

manually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed when

the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the

button.

Display

Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent

sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.

if an object is detected to the left rear of the

vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear

speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the

shorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is less than

approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is

sounded.

With front PDC: if objects are located both in

front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating

continuous signal is sounded.

An interval tone is interrupted with the appro‐

priate equipment after about 3 seconds:

▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

is detected by only one of the corner sen‐

sors.

▷ If moving parallel to a wall.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector

lever position P is engaged on vehicles with

Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐

justed similar to the sound and volume set‐

tings of the radio.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can

be shown on the Control Display. Objects that

are farther away are already displayed on the

Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance

Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in the

colors green, yellow and red.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐

played, the reel can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under

the following circumstances:

▷ For small children and animals.

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.

▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud

machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐

aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such as

high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐

treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other

vehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▷ With moving objects.

Seite 153

Driving comfort Controls

153

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.

▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

▷ With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences.

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can

move into the blind area of the sensors before

or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

PDC may issue a warning under the following

conditions even though there is no obstacle

within the detection range:

▷ In heavy rain.

▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.

▷ When sensors are covered in snow.

▷ On rough road surfaces.

▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.

▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐

rages.

▷ In automatic car washes.

▷ Through heavy pollution.

▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,

sweeping machines, high pressure steam

cleaners or neon lights.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded

area on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐

sors.

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and

maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Surround View

The concept

Surround View comprises various camera as‐

sistance systems that help the driver when

parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits

and intersections.

▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 154

▷ Side View, refer to page 157.

▷ Top View, refer to page 158.

Rearview camera

The concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in

parking and maneuvering backwards. The area

behind the vehicle is shown on the Control

Display.

Hints

Check the traffic situation as well

Check the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐

dent could result from road users or objects

that are not lidtured by the camera.◀

Seite 154

Controls Driving comfort

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the

tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by

dirt.

Clean the camera lens, refer to page 254.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐

tion P R.

Automatic deactivation during forward

travel

The system switches off when a certain driving

distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

Switching on/off manually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

The rearview camera image is displayed when

the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the

button.

Switching the view via iDrive

With PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement

▷ The rearview camera is switched on.

▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐

tive at the same time.

▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

▷ Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Seite 155

Driving comfort Controls

155

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Pathway lines

▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the

image of the rearview camera.

▷ They help you to estimate how much

space is needed when parking and maneu‐

vering on level pavement.

▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐

ing angle and are continuously adjusted to

the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐

posed on the rearview camera image to‐

gether with pathway lines.

▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐

sible turning radius on a level road.

▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐

ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐

tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Obstacle markings can be faded into the image

of the rearview camera.

Their colored margins match the markings of

the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐

tance to the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turning

radius lines

Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐

dius lines lead to within the limits of the

parking space.

2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding

turning radius line.

Seite 156

Controls Driving comfort

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding

objects such as ledges may not be detected by

the system.

Assistance functions also take into account

data of the PDC.

Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to

page 152.

The objects displayed on the Control Display

under certain circumstances are closer than

they appear. Do not estimate the distance from

the objects on the display.

Side View

The concept

Side View provides an early look at cross traffic

at blind driveways and intersections. Road

users concealed by obstacles to the left and

right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐

tively late from the driver's seat. To improve

visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐

cle record the traffic situation on each side.

Hints

The images from both cameras are shown si‐

multaneously on the Control Display.

Check the traffic situation as well

Check the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle on blind driveways and intersections with

your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could

result from road users or objects located out‐

side the picture area of the Side View cam‐

eras.◀

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Side View

Cameras

Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐

ture the image.

The two camera lenses are located on the

sides of the bumper.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 254.

Seite 157

Driving comfort Controls

157

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Switching on/off

Switching on/off manually

Press button.

Automatic deactivation during forward

travel

The system switches off when a certain driving

distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

Display

The traffic area to the left and right is displayed

on the Control Display.

Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

the position of the front of the vehicle.

Brightness

With the Side View switched on:

"Brightness"

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast

With the Side View switched on:

"Contrast"

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

System limits

The cameras lidture a maximum range of

330 ft/100 m.

Top View

The concept

Top View provides assistance in parking and

maneuvering. The area around the doors and

the road area around the vehicle are shown on

the Control Display for this purpose.

General information

The image is lidtured by two cameras

integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the

rearview camera.

The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and

rear.

In this way, obstacles up to the height of the

exterior mirrors are detected early.

Hints

Check the traffic situation as well

Check the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐

dent could result from road users or objects

that are not lidtured by the camera.◀

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Top View

Seite 158

Controls Driving comfort

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Cameras

The lenses of the Top View camera are located

at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐

age quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 254.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐

tion P R.

The rearview camera image is displayed. To

switch to the Top View:

"Rear view camera"

Automatic deactivation during forward

travel

The system switches off when a certain driving

distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if needed.

Switching on/off manually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Top View is displayed.

The rearview camera image is displayed when

the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the

button.

Display

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can

be shown on the Control Display.

When the distance to an object is small, a red

bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in

the PDC display.

The display appears as soon as Top View is

activated.

When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐

played, it is possible to reel to top view:

"Rear view camera"

Brightness

With Top View switched on:

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast

With Top View switched on:

Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is reached, and press the controller.

Displaying the turning radius and

pathway lines

▷ The static, red turning radius line shows

the space needed to the side of the vehicle

when the steering wheel is turned all the

way.

Seite 159

Driving comfort Controls

159

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ The variable, green pathway line assists

you in assessing the amount of space ac‐

tually needed to the side of the vehicle.

The lane line depends on the engaged

gear and the current steering angle. The

track line is continuously adjusted for the

steering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines"

Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limits

Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐

uations:

▷ With a door open.

▷ With the trunk lid open.

▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.

▷ In poor light.

A Check Control message is displayed in some

of these situations.

Parking assistant

The concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐

lel to the road.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces

on both sides of the vehicle.

Manual transmission:

The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐

sible parking line and takes control of steering

during the parking procedure.

Steptronic transmission:

The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐

sible parking line and during the parking proce‐

dure takes control of steering, the acceleration

and braking and if needed changes the gears.

Hold down the parking assistant button for the

duration of the parking procedure. At the end

of the parking procedure, the P selector lever

position is set.

When parking, also take note of the visual and

acoustic information and instructions issued

by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐

view camera and react accordingly.

A component of the parking assistant is the

PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 152.

Hints

Personal responsibility

Even an active system does not relieve

the driver from personal responsibility while

driving.

Technically the system has its limits, it cannot

independently react to all traffic situations.

Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe

the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and

react when needed - risk of accident.◀

Changes to the parking space

Changes to the parking space after it was

measured are not taken into account by the

system.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐

vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐

dent.◀

Transporting cargo

Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter

of the vehicle is not taken into account by the

system during the parking procedure.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐

vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐

dent.◀

Seite 160

Controls Driving comfort

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Curbs

The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐

cle over or onto curb if need be.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐

vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐

cle may become damaged.◀

An engine that has been switched off by the

Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐

cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.

4 ft/1.2 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.

▷ Parking brake released.

▷ When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn signal

must be set where applicable.

Steptronic transmission:

▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking

spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.

To ensure full functionality:

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods and

maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the button

Press button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.

Seite 161

Driving comfort Controls

161

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switch off

The system can be deactivated as follows:

▷ Press button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but

not activated.

The system is activated.

System status

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side

of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant

is activated and search for parking space

active.

▷ Control Display shows suitable parking

spaces at the edge of the road next to the

vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant

is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐

lighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐

tive. Steering control has

been taken over by system.

▷ Parking space search is always active

whenever the vehicle is moving forward

slow and straight, even if the system is de‐

activated. When the system is deactivated,

the displays on the Control Display are

shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Check the traffic situation as well

Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐

hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and

PDC's signals.

Check the traffic situation around the vehicle

with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐

ger of an accident.◀

Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐

vate it if needed.

The status of the parking space search is

indicated on the Control Display.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐

play.

The best possible parking position will

come after gear change on the stationary

vehicle - wait for the automatic steering

wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indi‐

cated on the Control Display.

3. Adjust the parking position yourself if

needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any

time:

▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol

on the Control Display.

Seite 162

Controls Driving comfort

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Press button.

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the

following situations:

▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering.

▷ If a gear is selected that does not match

the instruction on the Control Display.

▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

6 mph/10 km/h.

▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road

surfaces.

▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome, such as curbs.

▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly

arise.

▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays

clearances that are too small.

▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary

to the desired side for parking.

▷ When switching to another function on the

Control Display.

Steptronic transmission:

▷ When the button is released.

▷ If the trunk lid is open.

▷ If doors are open.

▷ When setting the parking brake.

▷ During acceleration.

▷ When braking.

▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resume

An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐

tinued if needed.

Follow the instructions on the Control Display

to do this.

System limits

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assis‐

tance in the following situations:

▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the

following situations:

▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.

▷ On slippery ground.

▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.

▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the

parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under

the following circumstances:

▷ For small children and animals.

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.

▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud

machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐

aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such as

high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐

treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other

vehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▷ With moving objects.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.

▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

Seite 163

Driving comfort Controls

163

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences.

▷ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can

move into the blind area of the sensors before

or after a continuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify parking

spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system

checked.

Seite 164

Controls Driving comfort

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left

2 Temperature, left

3 AUTO program, left

4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat

5 Remove ice and condensation

6 Maximum cooling

7 Display

8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right

9 AUTO program, right

10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right

12 Seat heating, right 56

13 Active seat ventilation, right 57

14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode

15 Cooling function

16 Rear window defroster

17 SYNC program

18 Active seat ventilation, left 57

19 Seat heating, left 56

Seite 165

Climate control Controls

165

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Hints

Sufficient ventilation

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐

nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐

culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in

the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐

dow condensation increases.◀

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution

Press button repeatedly to select a

program:

▷ Upper body region.

▷ Upper body region and footwell.

▷ Footwell.

▷ Windows and footwell.

▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.

▷ Windows: driver's side only.

▷ Windows and upper body region.

If the windows are fogged over, press the

AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the

condensation sensor.

Temperature

Turn the ring to set the desired

temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this

temperature as quickly as possible, if needed

by using the maximum cooling or heating li‐

dacity, and then keeps it constant.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐

perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐

mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐

just the set temperature.

AUTO program

Press button.

Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature,

AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐

ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side

windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 167, is

switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐

gram.

At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐

trols the program so as to prevent window

condensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐

matic intensity control can be changed.

Press the left or right side of the but‐

ton: decrease or increase the inten‐

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display

of the automatic climate control.

Air flow, manual

To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐

gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐

ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display of

the automatic climate control.

The air flow of the automatic climate control

may be reduced automatically to save battery

power.

Defrosts windows and removes

condensation

Press button.

Seite 166

Controls Climate control

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Ice and condensation are quickly removed

from the windshield and the front side win‐

dows.

For this purpose, point the side vents onto the

side windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

If the windows are fogged over, you can also

switch on the cooling function or press the

AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐

sor.

Maximum cooling

Press button.

The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, optimum air flow and air circulation

mode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐

gion. The vents need to be open for this.

The function is available above an external

temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the

engine running is indicated.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

Automatic recirculated-air control/

recirculated-air mode

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐

tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐

rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The

system then recirculates the air currently

within the vehicle.

Press button repeatedly to select an

operating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.

▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in the

outside air and shuts off automatically.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the

supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐

manently blocked.

If the windows are fogged over, switch off the

recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO

button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐

densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow

to the windshield.

Sufficient ventilation

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐

nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐

culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in

the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐

dow condensation increases.◀

Cooling function

The car's interior can only be cooled with the

engine running.

Press button.

The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐

fied and, depending on the temperature set‐

ting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and

side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐

gine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐

cally with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water, refer to page 191, devel‐

ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Rear window defroster

Press button.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

SYNC program

The current settings on the driver's

side for temperature, air flow, air distri‐

bution, and AUTO program are transferred to

the front passenger side and to the left and

right rear.

The program is switched off if the settings on

the front passenger side or in the rear are

changed.

Seite 167

Climate control Controls

167

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Residual heat

The heat stored in the engine is used to heat

the interior.

Functional requirement

▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the

engine.

▷ Warm engine.

▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.

▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.

The availability of the function is shown on the

display of the automatic climate control.

Switching on

Switch off the ignition.

Press the right side of the button

on the driver's side.

The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐

mate Control Display.

The interior temperature, air volume and air

distribution can be adjusted with the ignition

switched on.

Switch off

At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of

the button on the driver's side.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

climate control flashes.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off

▷ Complete system:

Press and hold the left button on

the driver's side until the control

clicks off.

▷ On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the left button on

the front passenger side.

Switching on

Press any button except:

▷ Rear window defroster.

▷ Left side of Air volume button.

▷ Seat heating.

▷ Seat ventilation.

▷ If necessary, SYNC program.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter removes dust and pollen from

the incoming air.

The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous

pollutants from the outside air that enters the

vehicle.

This combined filter should be replaced during

scheduled maintenance, refer to page 236, of

your vehicle.

Ventilation

Front ventilation

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature in

the upper body region, arrow 1.

Toward blue: colder.

Toward red: warmer.

The set interior temperature for the driver

and passenger are not changed.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,

arrow 2.

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the

vents continuously, arrows 3.

Seite 168

Controls Climate control

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Ventilation levels

▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air

current is fanned out.

▷ Maximum air flow:

Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air

is partially fanned out and partially bundled.

This maximizes the air supply.

▷ Direct ventilation:

Thumbwheel, arrow 3, in level : the air

is bundled and can be directed to a specific

point.

Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's

interior is too hot.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:

Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in rear, center

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐

row 1.

Toward blue: colder.

Toward red: warmer.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,

arrow 2.

▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 3.

Ventilation, side

▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 1.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,

arrow 2.

Rear automatic climate

control

At a glance

1 Temperature

2 AUTO program

3 Vent settings

4 Air flow, AUTO intensity

5 Display

6 Maximum cooling

7 Seat heating 56

Switching the rear automatic climate

control on/off

"Settings"

2. "Climate"

Seite 169

Climate control Controls

169

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

3. "Rear climate"

The rear automatic climate control is not op‐

erational if the automatic climate control is

switched off or if the function for defrosting or

defogging the windows is active.

AUTO program

Press button.

Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, the

AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air

is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐

well.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐

cally with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐

matic intensity control can be changed:

Press the left or right side of the but‐

ton: decrease or increase the inten‐

sity.

The selected intensity is shown on the display

of the automatic climate control.

Temperature

Turn the ring to set the desired

temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this

temperature as quickly as possible, if needed

by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐

pacity, and then keeps it constant.

Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐

perature settings. The automatic climate con‐

trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the

set temperature.

Manual air distribution

The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐

ual needs.

Press button repeatedly to select a

program:

▷ Upper body region.

▷ Upper body region and footwell.

▷ Footwell.

Air flow, manual

To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐

gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐

ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display of

the automatic climate control.

Switching the system on/off

Switch off

Press and hold the left button.

Switching on

Press any button except:

▷ Left side of Air volume button.

▷ Seat heating.

Maximum cooling

Press button.

The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air flow and air circulation

mode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐

gion. The vents need to be open for this.

Air is cooled as quickly as possible:

▷ At an external temperature of approx.

32 ℉/0 ℃.

▷ When the engine is running.

Seite 170

Controls Climate control

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Parked-car ventilation

The concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐

cle interior and lowers its temperature, if

needed.

Operation can be performed via iDrive.

Functional requirements

Parked-car ventilation

▷ Using the preset reel-on time or when op‐

erated directly: any external temperature.

Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes if the system is switched on.

The system continues to run for some time af‐

ter being switched off.

Preselecting the reel-on time

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

4. Set the desired time.

Activating the reel-on time

On the Control Display:

"Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐

vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes when the system has been

switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the

next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐

vated.

Seite 171

Climate control Controls

171

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Universal Integrated Remote

Control

The concept

The universal garage door opener can operate

up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐

tems such as garage door drives or lighting

systems. The universal garage door opener re‐

places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.

To operate the remote control, the buttons on

the interior rearview mirror must be program‐

med with the desired functions. The hand-held

transmitter for the particular system is required

in order to program the remote control.

During programming

During programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the universal garage door

opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐

mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐

trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐

jury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-

held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored

functions for the sake of security.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packag‐

ing or in the instructions of the system

to be controlled, the system is gener‐

ally compatible with the universal garage door

opener.

If you have any questions, please contact:

▷ Your service center.

▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Corporation.

Control elements on the interior

rearview mirror

▷ LED, arrow 1.

▷ Buttons, arrow 2.

▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐

quired for programming.

Programming

General information

Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on

the interior rearview mirror simultaneously

for approximately 20 seconds until the LED

on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

Seite 172

Controls Interior equipment

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

erases all programming of the buttons on

the interior rearview mirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐

tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to

8 cm away from the buttons of the interior

rearview mirror. The required distance de‐

pends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the button

of the desired function on the hand-held

transmitter and the button to be program‐

med on the interior rearview mirror. The

LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐

gin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED

flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing

faster indicates that the button on the inte‐

rior rearview mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after at

least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐

tween the interior rearview mirror and the

hand-held transmitter and repeat the step.

Several more attempts at different distan‐

ces may be necessary. Wait at least

15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior rearview mirror button

and repeatedly press and release the

hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐

onds.

To program other functions on other but‐

tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte‐

rior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-

code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after

repeated programming, please check if the

system to be controlled features an alternat‐

ing-code system.

Read the system's operating manual, or press

the programmed button on the interior rear‐

view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior

rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then

stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system

features an alternating-code system. Flashing

and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐

peat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with an alternating-code system,

the universal garage door opener and the sys‐

tem also have to be synchronized.

Please read the operating manual to find out

how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐

ond person.

To synchronize:

Park the vehicle within range of the re‐

mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interior

rearview mirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing button

on the system being programmed. You

have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the

interior rearview mirror for approximately

3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,

repeat this step up to three times in order

to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐

zation is complete, the programmed func‐

tion will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

Switch on the ignition.

2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror

button to be programmed.

3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED

starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held

transmitter for the system to be controlled

approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the

buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The

required distance depends on the manual

transmitter.

Seite 173

Interior equipment Controls

173

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the

desired function on the hand-held trans‐

mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐

rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐

idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that

the button on the interior rearview mirror

has been programmed. The system can

then be controlled by the button on the in‐

terior rearview mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after at

least 60 seconds, change the distance and

repeat the step. Several more attempts at

different distances may be necessary. Wait

at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-

held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior rearview mirror button

and repeatedly press and release the

hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐

onds.

Controls

Before operation

Before operating a system using the uni‐

versal garage door opener, ensure that there

are no people, animals, or objects within the

range of movement of the remote-controlled

system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or

damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-

held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can be

operated using the button on the interior rear‐

view mirror while the engine is running or when

the ignition is started. To do this, hold down

the button within receiving range of the system

until the function is activated. The interior rear‐

view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐

nal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the left and right button on the

interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐

proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes

rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The

functions cannot be deleted individually.

Sun visor

Glare shield

Fold the sun visor down or up.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐

hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the

mirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Manual transmission: Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying

Take out the insert.

Lighter

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as

soon as it pops back out.

Seite 174

Controls Interior equipment

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote

control with you when leaving the vehicle so

that children cannot use the lighter and burn

themselves.◀

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter

socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Steptronic transmission: Front

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying

Take out the insert.

Lighter

Press on the cover.

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as

soon as it pops back out.

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote

control with you when leaving the vehicle so

that children cannot use the lighter and burn

themselves.◀

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter

socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Rear

Opening

Press on the cover.

Emptying

Take out the insert.

Seite 175

Interior equipment Controls

175

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Lighter

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.

Take the remote control with you when leaving

the vehicle so that children cannot use the

lighter and burn themselves.◀

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter

socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Connecting electrical

devices

Hints

Do not connect charging devices to the

12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐

tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as

this may damage the vehicle battery due to an

increased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after

use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter

socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Sockets

General information

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for

electrical equipment while the engine is run‐

ning or when the ignition is switched on.

Note

The total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable

connectors.

Front center console: manual

transmission

Press on the cover.

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Front center console: Steptronic

transmission

Press on the cover.

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Seite 176

Controls Interior equipment

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Center armrest

Remove the cover.

Rear center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the front passenger footwell

Socket is located below the glove compart‐

ment.

To access the socket: fold open the cover.

In the cargo area

The socket is located in the cover of the load‐

ing lip.

To access the socket: fold open the cover.

USB interface for data

transfer

The concept

Connection for importing and exporting data

on USB devices, e.g.:

▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.

▷ Music collection, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐

cation.

Hints

Observe the following when connecting:

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lights to the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.

▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐

ing external devices.

With navigation system Professional

or TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐

rest.

Through-loading system

The concept

The cargo area can be enlarged by folding

down the rear seat backrest.

Seite 177

Interior equipment Controls

177

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts

at a ratio of 60 to 40.

The sides can be folded down separately or to‐

gether.

Hints

Danger of jamming

Before folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that the area of movement of the

backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no

one is located in or reaches into the area of

movement of the rear seat backrests when the

middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐

jury or damage may result.◀

Ensuring the stability of the child seat

When installing child restraint systems,

make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐

tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and

headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐

justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that

all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise

the stability of the child seat can be affected,

and there is an increased risk of injury because

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐

rest.◀

Opening

Move the front seats to an upright posi‐

tion

Before folding down the rear backrests, ensure

that the front seats are moved forward slightly

and are in an upright position. Otherwise, the

head restraint and screen could be damaged.◀

1. Unlock the belt lock of the center safety

belt in the rear using the latch plate of an‐

other safety belt.

2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt

into the specially designated fixture on the

rear window shelf.

3. Push the corresponding head restraint

down as far as it will go.

4. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo

area to release the rear seat backrest.

5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves

forward slightly.

6. Fold backrest forward.

Seite 178

Controls Interior equipment

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Closing

1. Return the rear seat backrest to the upright

seating position and engage it.

Ensure that the lock is securely en‐

gaged

Make sure that the lock engages properly

when folding back, otherwise transported

cargo could enter the car's interior during

braking or evasive maneuvers and endan‐

ger the vehicle's occupants.◀

2. Release the belt tongue from the fixture on

the rear window shelf.

3. Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the

center safety belt. Make sure you hear the

latch plate engage.

To secure cargo, refer to page 193, with nets

or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with

lashing eyes.

Ski bag

Capacity

The ski bag can be used to transport up to four

pairs of skis with a length of up to 6 ft/2.10 m

or, depending on the binding, up to two snow‐

boards with a length of up to 5 ft/1.60 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag

Fold open the center armrest on the inside.

2. Open the inside cover and cargo area by

pressing the button.

3. Lay out the ski bag.

4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the

sharp edges of the skis.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the belt buckle.

6. Tighten the retaining strap.

Securing the ski bag

Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐

taining strap; otherwise, the contents could

present a source of danger to the passengers,

for example during braking or evasive maneu‐

vers.◀

Removing the ski bag

The ski bag can be removed entirely, e.g., to

dry quickly or to use other inserts.

Seite 179

Interior equipment Controls

179

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

1. Pull the handle forward and lift the ski bag

out.

2. Close the cover in the cargo area.

More information on the various inserts availa‐

ble can be obtained from your service center.

Seite 180

Controls Interior equipment

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Hints

No loose objects in the car's interior

Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐

rior without securing them; otherwise, they

may present a danger to occupants e.g., during

braking and evasive maneuvers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐

board

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.

The mat materials could damage the dash‐

board.◀

Storage compartments

The following storage compartments are avail‐

able in the vehicle interior:

▷ Glove compartment on the driver's and

front passenger side, refer to page 181.

▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐

sole: manual transmission.

▷ Storage compartment, refer to page 184,

in the center console for remote control:

Steptronic transmission.

▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐

rest, refer to page 182, in the front and

rear.

▷ Compartments in the doors.

▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front

seats.

▷ Net in the front passenger footwell.

Glove compartment

Front passenger side

Note

Close the glove compartment again im‐

mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐

ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐

cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches

on.

Closing

Fold cover closed.

Seite 181

Storage compartments Controls

181

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Driver's side

Note

Close the glove compartment again im‐

mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately af‐

ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐

cur during accidents.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.

Closing

Fold cover closed.

Center armrest

Front

A storage compartment is located in the center

armrest between the front seats.

Opening

Press button.

Locking the storage compartment

The storage compartment in the armrest can

be locked with an integrated key to separately

secure the trunk lid, refer to page 42, e.g.

After the storage compartment is locked, the

remote control can be handed out without the

integrated key, refer to page 34, for instance at

a hotel.

This prevents access to the storage compart‐

ment and to the cargo area.

Connection for an external audio

device

An external audio device, e.g.,

an MP3 player, can be con‐

nected via the AUX-IN port or

the USB audio interface in the

center armrest.

Rear

The center armrest contains a storage com‐

partment.

Seite 182

Controls Storage compartments

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Folding down

Pull on the opener and fold the armrest for‐

ward.

Opening

Pull on the handle and fold open the cover.

Cupholders

Hints

Shatter-proof containers and no hot

drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do

not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is

the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containers

Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐

tainers into the cupholders. This may result in

damage.◀

Manual transmission: Front

On the center console

To open: press the button.

The insert folds out.

To use as a storage compartment, fold the in‐

sert back in.

Steptronic transmission: Front

To open: press on the cover.

Rear

In the front center armrest.

The cupholder can be adjusted for three differ‐

ent container sizes.

Seite 183

Storage compartments Controls

183

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

To open: press the button.

To reduce in size: fold closed to the desired

position.

To close: fold all the way closed. The cu‐

pholder must be closed before it can be

opened fully.

Remote control storage

compartment

Opening

Press on the cover.

Remote control storage compartment

Storage is possible in a vertical position in the

center armrest.

Clothes hooks

The clothes hooks are located next to the grab

handles in the rear and on the door pillar in the

rear.

Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐

er's view.◀

No heavy objects

Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger

to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐

neuvers.◀

Storage compartments in the

trunk

Net

Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the

side of the trunk.

To transport larger objects, it can be pushed

down.

Multi-function hook

A multi-function hook is available on the left

trunk wall.

Lightweight objects only

Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐

ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐

erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about

during braking and evasive maneuvers.

Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it

has been appropriately secured.◀

Seite 184

Controls Storage compartments

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Storage under the cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel.

Storage compartment on the side

A storage compartment is located at the side

of the trunk.

Lashing eyes

To secure the cargo, refer to page 193, there

are lashing eyes in the trunk.

Seite 185

Storage compartments Controls

185

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Driving tips

This chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and

operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐

other (break-in time).

The following instructions will help accomplish

a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐

trol, refer to page 82.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road

speed:

▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and

93 mph/150 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐

stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be

increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐

ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;

they achieve their full traction potential after a

break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐

prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐

formance between brake discs and brake

pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐

riod.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal

level only after a distance driven of approx.

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,

engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be ob‐

served if any of the components above-men‐

tioned have to be renewed in the course of the

vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the trunk lid

Drive with the trunk lid closed

Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐

wise, in the event of an accident or braking and

evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐

fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be

damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐

ter the vehicle interior.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be

avoided:

Seite 188

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.

▷ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system

High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.

Do not remove the heat shields installed and

never apply undercoating to them. Make sure

that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,

grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot

exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐

sition mode, or when parked. Such contact

could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased

risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐

erty damage.

Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,

there is a danger of getting burned.◀

Diesel particulate filter

The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐

cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐

peratures.

During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐

ing may occur:

▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less

smoothly.

▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐

ing from the exhaust until shortly after the

engine is shut down.

▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐

sary to reach usual performance.

Climate control windshield

The marked area is not covered with heat re‐

flective coating.

Use this area for garage door openers, devices

for electronic toll collection, etc.

Climate control laminated tinted

safety glass

The vehicle glass provides full protection

against the harmful effects of UV radiation on

the skin.

Mobile communication devices in the

vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐

hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones,

such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior

without a direct connection to an external aer‐

ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and

mobile communication devices can interfere

with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐

ance that the radiation generated during trans‐

mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐

cle interior.◀

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can

form between the tires and road surface.

Seite 189

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

189

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐

ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete

loss of contact between the tires and the road

surface, ultimately undermining your ability to

steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

Observe water level and speed

Do not exceed the maximum water level

and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's

engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐

mission may be damaged.◀

Drive though calm water only and only if it is

not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this

height, no faster than walking speed, up to

3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safely

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐

ard feature.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective

way of braking in situations needed.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid

any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐

fort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from

the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its

active mode.

In certain braking situations, the perforated

brake discs can cause functional problems.

However, this has no effect on the perform‐

ance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects within the range of movement

of the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the

function of the pedals could be impeded while

driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing

mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved

for the vehicle and can be properly attached to

floor.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐

tened again after they were removed for clean‐

ing, e.g.◀

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,

press brake pedal ever so gently every few

miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger

other traffic.

The heat generated in this process helps dry

the brake discs and pads.

In this way braking efficiency will be available

when you need it.

Hills

Avoid stressing the brakes

Avoid placing excessive stress on the

brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐

sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes

wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutral

Do not drive in neutral or with the engine

stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.

In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐

available with the engine stopped.◀

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐

wise the brakes may overheat and reduce

brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect

by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,

if needed.

Brake disc corrosion

Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the

brake pads are favored by:

▷ Low mileage.

Seite 190

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.

▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.

Corrosion will built up when the maximum

pressure applied to the brake pads during

braking is not reached - thus discs don't get

cleaned.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause

a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐

sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked

vehicle

When using the automatic climate control,

condensation water develops collecting under‐

neath the vehicle.

These traces of water under the vehicle are

normal.

Seite 191

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

191

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Hints

Overloading the vehicle

To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐

pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle.

Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐

creases the rate at which damage develops in‐

side the tires. This could result in a sudden

loss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the cargo area

Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐

aged.◀

Heavy and hard objects

Do not stow any heavy and hard objects

in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐

erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐

pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐

vers.◀

Determining the load limit

Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle’s placard:

▷ The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

vehicle and unstable driving situations

may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kilograms or

YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐

pacity.

For example, if the YYY amount equals

1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =

400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐

gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐

cle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

Seite 192

Driving tips Loading

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the

less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐

ble, directly behind and at the bottom of

the rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safety

belts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of

the backrests.

Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the trunk

To secure the cargo there are four lashing

eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo

Stow and secure the cargo as described;

otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐

pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐

vers.◀

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐

taining straps or with a cargo net or draw

straps.

▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with

cargo straps.

Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or

draw straps on the lashing eyes in the trunk.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

Note

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing

Follow the installation instructions of the roof

rack.

Seite 193

Loading Driving tips

193

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Roof drip rail with flaps

The anchorage points are located in the roof

drip rail above the doors.

Fold the cover outward.

Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained

for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center

of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐

fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐

sponse.

Therefore, note the following when loading

and driving:

▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle

weight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.

▷ The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.

▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.

▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie

with ratchet straps.

▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the trunk lid.

▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐

ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners

gently.

Seite 194

Driving tips Loading

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

General information

Your vehicle contains advanced technology for

the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐

sions.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐

ferent factors.

Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐

erate driving style and regular maintenance,

can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐

ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts

following use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage

racks which are no longer required following

use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐

dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass

sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows

open results in increased air resistance and

thereby reduces the range.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect fuel consumption in various

ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐

sumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure

regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation

pressure at least twice a month and before

starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐

sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and

tire wear.

Drive away immediately

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while

the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving

right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the quickest way of warming the cold

engine up to operating temperature.

Look well ahead when

driving

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐

cle driving ahead of you.

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel

consumption.

Seite 195

Saving fuel Driving tips

195

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Avoid high engine speeds

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers

fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐

ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When

accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐

gine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into

the highest applicable gear and drive with the

engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐

stant speed.

If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of

the vehicle, refer to page 95.

Use coasting

When approaching a red light, take your foot

off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to

a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐

erator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during

longer stops

Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,

at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic

congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle

automatically switches off the engine during a

stop.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted

rather than leaving the engine running con‐

stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are

reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐

onds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐

mined by other factors, such as driving style,

road conditions, maintenance or environmental

factors.

Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear

window defroster require a lot of energy and

reduce the range, especially in city and stop-

and-go traffic.

Reel off these functions if they are not needed.

The ECO PRO driving program supports the

energy conserving use of comfort features.

These functions are automatically deactivated

partially or completely.

Have maintenance carried

out

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve

optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.

The maintenance should be carried out by

your service center.

Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer

to page 236.

ECO PRO

The concept

ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves

on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐

gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐

mate control output, are adjusted.

Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐

matically decoupled from the transmission in

the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐

tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐

duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position

D remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are

displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐

sumption driving style.

Seite 196

Driving tips Saving fuel

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The achieved extended range is displayed in

the instrument cluster as bonus range.

Overview

The system includes the following

EfficientDynamics functions and displays:

▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 197.

▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 198

▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 197.

▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to

page 199.

Activate ECO PRO

Press button repeatedly until ECO

PRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

Activate ECO PRO.

2. "Configure ECO PRO"

3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive

"Settings"

2. "ECO PRO mode"

"Settings"

2. "Driving mode"

3. "Configure ECO PRO"

Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":

Adjust the ECO PRO speed.

▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":

The output is reduced once the set ECO

PRO speed is reached.

Coasting

Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐

ing the engine and Coasting, refer to

page 199, with the engine idling.

This function is only available in ECO PRO

mode.

ECO PRO climate control

"ECO PRO climate control"

Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.

By making a slight change to the set tempera‐

ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or

cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption

can be economized.

The mirror heating is made available when out‐

side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potential

Shows potential savings with the current set‐

tings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

Display in the instrument display

When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display

switches to a special configuration.

Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐

play in the instrument cluster.

Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐

nus range in stages.

In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in

blue in the total range display.

ECO PRO bonus range

An adjusted driving style helps

you extend your driving range.

This may be displayed as the

bonus range in the instrument

cluster.

Seite 197

Saving fuel Driving tips

197

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every

time the vehicle is refueled.

Efficiency display

Display in the instrument cluster

Display in the instrument display

A mark in the efficiency display informs about

the current driving style.

Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐

ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐

celerating.

Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the

bar's color:

▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range.

▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.

The display switches to blue as soon as all

conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving

are met.

ECO PRO tip, driving tip

The arrow indicates that the driving

style can be adjusted to be more fuel

efficient by backing off the accelerator

for instance.

Note

The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the

instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO

display is activated.

Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:

1. "Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "ECO PRO Info"

In the instrument display:

"Settings"

2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Driving mode view"

ECO PRO tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are

displayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving back off the ac‐

celerator or delay accelerating to al‐

low time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECO

PRO speed.

Steptronic transmission: shift from

M/S to D.

Steptronic transmission/manual

transmission: follow shifting instruc‐

tions.

Manual transmission: engage neu‐

tral for engine stop.

Seite 198

Driving tips Saving fuel

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Indications on the Control Display

EfficientDynamics

Information on fuel consumption and technol‐

ogy can be displayed while driving.

1. "Vehicle info"

2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying fuel consumption history

The average fuel consumption can be dis‐

played within an adjustable time frame.

Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐

lected time frame.

Trip interruptions are represented below the

bar on the time axis.

"Consumption history"

Adjusting fuel consumption history

time frame

Select the symbol.

Resetting fuel consumption history

Open "Options".

2. "Reset consumption history"

Displaying EfficientDynamics info

The current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info"

The following systems are displayed:

▷ Auto Start/Stop function.

▷ Energy recovery.

▷ Climate control output.

▷ Coasting.

Display ECO PRO tips

"ECO PRO Tips"

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Coasting

The concept

The system helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine

is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐

sion when selector lever position D is set. The

vehicle continues traveling with the engine

idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector

lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coast‐

ing.

As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐

tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled

again.

Hints

Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐

fer to page 196, driving mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when ECO

PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics

Control.

The function is available in a certain speed

range.

A proactively driving style helps the driver to

use the function as often as possible and sup‐

ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety mode

The function is not available under one of the

following conditions.

▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.

▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.

▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low

or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐

sive current.

▷ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements

In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in

a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐

Seite 199

Saving fuel Driving tips

199

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if

the following conditions are met:

▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not

operated.

▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐

tion D.

▷ Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.

The driving status Coast can be influenced

with the shift paddles.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster

The mark in the efficiency dis‐

play below the tachometer is

backlit in blue and is located at

the zero point. The tachometer

approximately indicates idle

speed.

The coasting point indicator is illuminated at

the zero point during coasting.

Display in the instrument display

The mark in the efficiency dis‐

play is backlit in blue and is lo‐

cated at the zero point.

The coasting point indicator is il‐

luminated at the zero point dur‐

ing coasting.

Indications on the Control Display

The Coasting driving condition is displayed in

EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode

is active.

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:

driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info

"Vehicle info"

2. "EfficientDynamics"

3. "EfficientDynamics info"

Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐

ure ECO PRO, refer to page 197, menu, e.g., to

use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐

eling downhill.

Settings are stored for the profile currently in

use.

Seite 200

Driving tips Saving fuel

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Seite 201

Saving fuel Driving tips

201

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Mobility

In order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids,

wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Hints

Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to

page 206, prior to refueling.

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail

and damage might occur.◀

Diesel engines

The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐

sel fuel pumps.

Fuel lid

Opening

Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler

flap.

2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed

properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.

The release is located in the trunk.

Seite 204

Mobility Refueling

204

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when

refueling

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks

off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐

ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels

Observe safety regulations posted at the

gas station.◀

Seite 205

Refueling Mobility

205

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Fuel recommendation

Note

General fuel quality

Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐

tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐

gine problems, for instance poor engine start-

up behavior, poor handling and/or poor

performance. Switch gas stations or use a

brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline

should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐

tent.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐

taining metal must not be used.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐

out metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐

line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or

iron, as this can cause permanent damage to

the catalytic converter and other compo‐

nents.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should satisfy the following quality

standards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each

case.

Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐

age of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐

centage than recommended or one with other

types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise

this could damage the engine and fuel supply

system.◀

Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade

Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐

mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐

formance.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐

ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds

when starting at high outside temperatures.

This has no effect on the engine life.

Fuel quality

The use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐

tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐

ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐

ronmental conditions such as high ambient

temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐

ommend switching to a high quality gasoline

brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐

ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

Seite 206

Mobility Fuel

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

gine deposits, it is highly recommended to

purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations

may result in the need for unscheduled main‐

tenance.◀

Diesel

Low-Sulfur Diesel

The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel

with low sulfur content:

Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.

xx: comply with the current standard in each

case.

Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.

The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must

not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use

gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong

fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as

this may damage the engine.◀

After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐

ice center or Roadside Assistance.

If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler

pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that

you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is

equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.

In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel

cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,

please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for

instructions on how to add fuel.

For additional information regarding Roadside

Assistance, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐

gation, Entertainment and Communication.

Winter diesel

To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐

erational in the winter, use winter diesel.

It is available at gas stations during winter

months.

The fuel filter heating system, included as a

standard feature, prevents disruption of the

fuel supply while driving.

Do not add any diesel additives

Do not add additives, including gasoline;

otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀

BMW Advanced Diesel

The concept

BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐

ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel

exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust

system. A chemical reaction takes place inside

the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen

oxides.

The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled.

To be able to start the engine as usual, there

must be an adequate reducing agent.

Reducing agent is added by the service center.

Warming up the system

In order to warm the engine up to its operating

temperature after a cold start, the Steptronic

transmission may subsequently shift up to the

next higher gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Reserve indication

This display in the instrument cluster provides

information about the distance that can still be

driven with the current reserve level.

▷ Lamp white: refill with re‐

duction agent at the next

opportunity.

▷ Lamp yellow: not enough re‐

duction agent present. The

remaining range is displayed

in the instrument cluster. Im‐

mediately refill with reduc‐

tion agent, refer to

page 208.

Seite 207

Fuel Mobility

207

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum

▷ The remaining range is dis‐

played in the instrument

cluster: refill with reduction

agent. The engine will con‐

tinue to run as long as it is

not switched off and all

other operating conditions

are satisfied; sufficient fuel,

e.g.

Engine does not start

Do not continue driving to the limit of the

remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will

not be able to restart the engine after switch‐

ing it off. In certain cases, this could cause

safety to be impaired.◀

Filling with an incorrect fluid

A Check Control message is displayed when

an incorrect fluid is added.

After adding the incorrect fluid, contact your

service center.

System defect

A Check Control message is displayed when

there is a system defect.

Have the diesel exhaust fluid

replenished

The reducing agent is added by the service

center within the context of regular mainte‐

nance.

It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐

ished several times under particular circum‐

stances, e.g., if the vehicle is driven in a partic‐

ularly sporty style or if it is driven at high

altitudes.

The reducing agent must be replenished as

soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐

strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐

start the engine.

Diesel exhaust fluid at low

temperatures

Due to its physical properties, it is possible

that the reducing agent may also need to be

replenished between regular maintenance ap‐

pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un‐

der + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing

agent only immediately before driving off.

The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐

serve display in the instrument cluster.

At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐

ing level cannot be measured in some cases.

After adding reducing agent, the Reserve Dis‐

play is displayed only until the fill level can be

measured again.

Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid

yourself in exceptional cases

You can replenish reducing agent yourself in

exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service

center.

Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid

Do not come into contact with the reduc‐

ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations

may result.◀

Handling Diesel exhaust fluid

When working with reducing agent in

closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When

the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐

ing fumes may eslide.◀

Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach

of children

Keep reducing agent out of reach of children.◀

Avoid contact with surfaces

Avoid contact of reduction agent with

surfaces of the vehicle; otherwise, damage

could occur.◀

Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid

▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With

this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel

Seite 208

Mobility Fuel

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

exhaust fluid can be replenished simply

and safely.

▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32

Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your

service center.

Refill quantity

When the Reserve display starts, add at least

3 bottles of reducing agent.

This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters.

Tank for reducing agent

The tank for the reducing agent is located next

to the fuel tank.

Adding the reducing agent

Add the reducing agent when the ignition is

switched on.

Open the fuel filler flap, refer to page 204.

2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re‐

move.

3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it

will go, see arrow.

4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.

The vehicle tank will be filled.

The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐

tle no longer changes. It is not possible to

overfill.

5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐

screw it.

6. Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise.

7. Close the fuel filler flap.

After adding Diesel exhaust fluid

Note

Incorrect fluids

After filling with incorrect fluids, such as

antifreeze for washer fluid, do not start the en‐

gine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀

Contact your service center.

Disposing of bottles

You take your empty Diesel exhaust

fluid bottles to your service center for

disposal.

Seite 209

Fuel Mobility

209

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐

hold waste unless this is permitted by local

regulations.

Reserve indication

The Reserve display will still ap‐

pear along with the remaining

range after refilling.

Engine can be started.

After several minutes of driving,

the Reserve indication goes out.

Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum

After filling, the indication -- is

still displayed.

Only after the display goes out

can the engine -- be started.

Switch on the ignition.

Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute.

2. Engine can be started.

Seite 210

Mobility Fuel

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Tire inflation pressure

Safety information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐

sure influence the following:

▷ The service life of the tires.

▷ Road safety.

▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐

sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a

month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐

serve this precaution, you may be driving on

tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition

that may not only compromise your vehicle's

driving stability, but also lead to tire damage

and the risk of an accident.◀

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐

flation pressure.

Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐

tion pressure increases along with the tire's

temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐

fications relate to cold tires or tires with the

ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the

tires are cold. This means after driving no more

than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has

been parked for at least 2 hours.

The displays of inflation devices may under-

read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.

For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire

inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire

Monitor.

For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the

tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure

Monitor.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to

page 212, contains all tire inflation pressure

specifications for the specified tire sizes at the

ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure

specifications apply to approved tire sizes and

recommended tire brands. This information

can be obtained from your service center.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,

please note the following:

▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.

▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to

100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure

values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer

to page 212, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 211

Wheels and tires Mobility

211

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

These pressure values can also be found on

the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's

door pillar.

Maximum permissible speed

Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐

wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀

Tire inflation pressure values up to

100 mph/160 km/h

528i

Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear:

275/40 R 18 99 Y

RSC

2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

535i, 535d

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39

Seite 212

Mobility Wheels and tires

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

550i

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38

2.9 /42

528i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Seite 213

Wheels and tires Mobility

213

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

535i xDrive, 535d xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

550i xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.6 / 38

2.7 / 39

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39

3.1 / 45

Seite 214

Mobility Wheels and tires

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,

and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for

speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the

relevant table on the following pages. Other‐

wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Tire inflation pressure values over

100 mph/160 km/h

528i

Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.7 / 39

Seite 215

Wheels and tires Mobility

215

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.7 / 39

3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39

3.2 / 46

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

535i, 535d

Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.4 / 35

2.9 /42

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H

M+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

245/40 R 19 98 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.7 / 39

Seite 216

Mobility Wheels and tires

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.7 / 39

3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39

3.2 / 46

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

550i

Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.6 / 38

2.9 /42

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.9 /42 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.9 /42

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.9 /42

3.3 / 48

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42

3.3 / 48

Seite 217

Wheels and tires Mobility

217

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

528i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.4 / 35 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

225/55 R 17 97 V M

+S A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.8 / 41

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.8 / 41

3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.9 /42

3.3 / 48

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

535i xDrive, 535d xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature

Seite 218

Mobility Wheels and tires

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 2.9 /42

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.5 / 36

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.4 / 35

2.6 / 38

Front:

245/35 R 20 95 Y XL

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL

2.5 / 36

3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifica‐

tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

225/55 R 17 97 H M

+S RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear:

275/40 R 18 99 Y

RSC

2.8 / 41

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear:

275/35 R 19 96 Y

RSC

2.8 / 41

3.0 / 44

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear:

275/30 R 20 97 Y XL

RSC

2.9 /42

3.3 / 48

Emergency wheel:

T 135/90 R 17 104

Speed up to a max. of

50 mph / 80 km/h

4.2 / 60

550i xDrive

Without high-speed tuning feature

Seite 219

Wheels and tires Mobility

219

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

2.6 / 38

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

2.6 / 38

2.7 / 39

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

2.7 / 39

3.1 / 45

With high-speed tuning feature

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Specifications in

bar/PSI with cold

tires

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V M

+S XL A/S RSC

245/45 R 18 96 Y

RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V

M+S XL RSC

3.0 / 44 3.4 / 49

Front: 245/45 R 18

96 Y RSC

Rear: 275/40 R 18

99 Y RSC

3.0 / 44

Front: 245/40 R 19

94 Y RSC

Rear: 275/35 R 19

96 Y RSC

3.0 / 44

3.2 / 46

Front: 245/35 R 20

95 Y XL RSC

Rear: 275/30 R 20

97 Y XL RSC

3.1 / 45

3.4 / 49

Tire identification marks

Tire size

245/45 R 18 96 Y

245: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

18: rim diameter in inches

96: load rating, not for ZR tires

Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Seite 220

Mobility Wheels and tires

220

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Speed letter

Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h

R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h

S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h

T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0115: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of

the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the

1st week of 2015.

Recommendation

Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at

least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐

eral Safety Requirements in addition to these

grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐

ernment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,

times as well on the government course as a

tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual conditions of

their use, however, and may depart signifi‐

cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐

ing habits, service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured under

controlled conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐

terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds

to a level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band

A represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐

quired by law.

Seite 221

Wheels and tires Mobility

221

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Temperature grade for this tire

The temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐

tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.

If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀

RSC – Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are labeled

with a circular symbol containing the letters

RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold

weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than

0.12 in/3 mm.

There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if

the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than

0.16 in/4 mm.

Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are

less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the

tire's circumference and have the legally re‐

quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with

TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign

objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Hints

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,

as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles

can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and

suspension parts. This is more likely to occur

with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐

ioning between the wheel and the road. Be

careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your

speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped

with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐

fects:

▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.

▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over

curbs, road damage, or similar things.

Seite 222

Mobility Wheels and tires

222

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have the

rims and tires checked right away; otherwise,

there is the increased risk of an accident.

Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If

necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐

ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐

come life threatening for vehicle occupants

and also other traffic.◀

Repair of tire damage

For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have

damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐

placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐

sult.◀

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting

Information on mounting tires

Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center.

If work is not carried out properly, there is a

danger of subsequent damage and related

safety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combination

You can ask the service center about the right

wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions

for the vehicle.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair

the function of a variety of systems such as

ABS or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐

sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐

figuration from a single manufacturer.

Following tire damage, have the original wheel

and tire combination remounted on the vehicle

as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires

You should only use wheels and tires

that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐

facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g.,

despite having the same official size ratings,

variations can lead to chassis contact and with

it, the risk of severe accidents

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐

uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐

mine if they are suited for use, and therefore

cannot guarantee the operating safety of the

vehicle.◀

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐

hicle recommends certain tire brands. These

can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest

standards for safety and handling.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐

ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;

they achieve their full traction potential after a

break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐

ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Seite 223

Wheels and tires Mobility

223

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Retreaded tires

Possibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures can

limit service life and have a negative impact on

road safety.◀

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on

winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐

vide better winter traction than summer tires,

they do not provide the same level of perform‐

ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher

than the permissible speed for the winter tires,

then a respective symbol is displayed in your

field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the

tire specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires

Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐

age and accidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tires

If you are already using run-flat tires, for your

own safety you should replace them only with

the same kind. No spare tire is available in the

case of a flat tire. Your service center will be

glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front

and rear axles depending on individual driving

conditions. The tires can be rotated between

the axles to achieve even wear. Your service

center will be glad to advise you. After rotating,

check the tire pressure and correct if needed.

Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐

cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the

front and rear axles.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with

as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil,

grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐

sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires

Label

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐

porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐

cial rims.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to

remain drivable to a restricted degree in the

event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving

with a flat tire.

Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No

spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.

Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Mobility System

The concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage

can be sealed quickly to enable continued

travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped

Seite 224

Mobility Wheels and tires

224

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

into the tires, which seals the damage from the

inside.

The compressor can be used to check the tire

inflation pressure.

Hints

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor and

sealant container.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐

tive if the tire puncture measures approx.

1/8 in/4 mm or more.

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the

tire cannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies

that have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant

container and apply it to the steering

wheel.

▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM

wheel electronics. In this case, have the

electronics checked at the next opportu‐

nity and have them replaced if needed.

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may

lead to loss of consciousness and death. The

exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an

odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the

cargo floor panel.

Sealing container

▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 Holder for bottle

2 Compressor

3 Connector/cable for socket

4 Connection hose

5 On/off reel

6 Inflation pressure dial

7 Reduce inflation pressure

Seite 225

Wheels and tires Mobility

225

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Filling the tire with sealant

1. Shake the sealing container.

2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the

compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐

nector of the sealant container.

4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐

pressor housing in an upright position.

5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐

tainer onto the tire valve of the defective

wheel.

6. With the compressor switched off, insert

the plug into the power socket inside the

vehicle.

Seite 226

Mobility Wheels and tires

226

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

7. With the ignition turned on or the engine

running, reel on the compressor.

Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐

nutes

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than

10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat

and may be damaged.◀

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a

tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the

tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach

approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at

this point.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not

reached:

Switch off the compressor.

2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.

3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐

tribute the sealant in the tire.

4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be

reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System

Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐

tainer from the wheel.

2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐

pressor from the sealant container.

3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐

tainer previously connected to the tire

valve with the available connector on the

sealant container.

This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐

ing from the container.

4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐

ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo

area.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐

cle.

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐

sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the

tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less than

12 mph/20 km/h.

To correct the tire inflation pressure

Stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

3. Insert the connector into the power socket

inside the vehicle.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to

2.5 bar.

▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition

turned on or the engine running, reel

on the compressor.

▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐

ton on the compressor.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐

tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐

ble.

Seite 227

Wheels and tires Mobility

227

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Snow chains

Fine-link snow chains

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains

have been tested by the manufacturer of the

vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.

Information about the approved snow chains

are available from the service center.

Use

Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped

with the tires of the following size:

▷ 225/55 R 17.

▷ 245/45 R 18.

▷ 245/40 R 19.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐

tions.

Make sure that the snow chains are always

sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐

ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result

in incorrect readings.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after

mounting snow chains, as doing so may result

in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate

Dynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h

when using snow chains.

Snow chain detection

The concept

When using snow chains, settings should be

made via the iDrive for the snow chains being

applied.

The snow chain detection system supports

you by automatically showing the detected

state on the Control Display.

When snow chains are in use, the rear axle

steering of the Integral Active Steering is deac‐

tivated automatically.

At speeds above the maximum permitted

speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h,

the rear axle steering is activated again auto‐

matically.

Activating the status

1. "Settings"

2. "Tire chains"

3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detection

If functioning properly:

▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not

activated .

After you drive a short distance, a Check

Control message is shown and the state is

activated automatically.

Confirm the automatic activation.

▷ Snow chains are not mounted. Settings are

activated .

At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check

Control message is displayed. Deactivate

the status manually.

If not functioning properly:

▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not

activated .

A Check Control message is not displayed.

The automatic detection system is mal‐

functioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle

steering

If the status indicating that snow chains are in

use is activated, the rear axle steering is deac‐

tivated automatically.

At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle

steering is activated again, even though snow

chains are in use.

Seite 228

Mobility Wheels and tires

228

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number

2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

3 Washer fluid reservoir

4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

5 Oil filler neck

6 Coolant reservoir

Hood

Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment

Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the

necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐

lines, have any work on the vehicle performed

only by a service center.

If work is not carried out properly, there is a

danger of subsequent damage and related

safety hazards.◀

Seite 229

Engine compartment Mobility

229

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Never reach into the engine compart‐

ment

Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine

compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐

jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀

Danger of injury when the hood is open

There is a danger of injury from protrud‐

ing parts when the hood is open.◀

1. Pull the lever.

2. Press the release handle and open the

hood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Closing the hood

Hood open when driving

If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐

mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of jamming

Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16

in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.

The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Seite 230

Mobility Engine compartment

230

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on

the driving style and driving conditions.

The engine oil consumption can increase in

case of, for example:

▷ Sporty driving.

▷ Break-in the engine.

▷ Idling of the engine.

▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level

after refueling.

Depending on its engine, the vehicle is equip‐

ped with electronic oil measurement or oil

measuring is done with a dipstick.

The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐

uring principles:

▷ Status display

▷ Detailed measurement

Electronic oil measurement

Status display

The concept

The engine oil level is monitored electronically

while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐

play.

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum

level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements

A current measured value is available after ap‐

prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter

trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip

is displayed.

With frequent short-distance trips, regularly

perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level

On the Control Display:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Engine oil level display messages

Different messages appear on the display de‐

pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention

to these messages.

If the engine oil level is too low, within the next

125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to

page 232.

Engine oil level too low

Add engine oil immediately; otherwise,

an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐

sult in engine damage.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 231

Engine oil Mobility

231

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Too much engine oil

Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐

gine damage.◀

Detailed measurement

The concept

In the detailed measurement the engine oil

level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Gasoline engine:

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum

level, a check control message is displayed.

Diesel engine:

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum

level or an overfilling is detected, a check con‐

trol message is displayed.

During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐

creased somewhat.

General information

A detailed measurement is only possible with

certain engines.

Requirements

▷ Vehicle is on level road.

▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral

position, clutch and accelerator pedals not

depressed.

▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in

selector lever position N or P and accelera‐

tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐

perature.

Performing a detailed measurement

In order to perform a detailed measurement of

the engine oil level:

"Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Measure engine oil level"

4. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed

via a scale.

Time: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oil

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐

cle before engine oil is added.

Oil filler neck

Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐

played in the instrument cluster or when the

engine oil level has almost dropped to the

lower mark of the dipstick.

Add 1 US quart/liter.

Adding engine oil

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;

otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀

Do not add too much engine oil

When too much engine oil is added, im‐

mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,

this may cause engine damage.◀

Protect children

Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐

ers to prevent health risks.◀

Seite 232

Mobility Engine oil

232

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Engine oil types to add

Hints

No oil additives

Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Viscosity grades for engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity

grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,

and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine

damage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of

the engine.

Suitable engine oil types

You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐

ing oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Diesel engine

BMW Longlife-04.

Further information regarding the oil specifica‐

tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐

quired with the service center.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is

not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐

gine oil with the following oil rating can be

added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior oil rating.

Diesel engine

API CJ-4.

Engine oil change:

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you let the service center change the motor oil.

Seite 233

Engine oil Mobility

233

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Hints

Danger of burns from hot engine

Do not open the cooling system while

the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant

may cause burns.◀

Suitable additives

Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are

harmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are

suitable for the vehicle. Information about the

suitable additives are available from the service

center.

Coolant level

General information

If there is no Min. and Max. mark in the filler

neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant

level checked if needed by your service center

and add coolant as needed.

Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐

ant reservoir is located on the right side or the

left side of the engine compartment.

Checking

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess

pressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐

tween the minimum and maximum marks

in the filler neck.

Seite 234

Mobility Coolant

234

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Adding

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excess

pressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.

The arrows on the coolant reservoir and

the lid must point towards one another.

5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmen‐

tal protection regulations when dispos‐

ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 235

Coolant Mobility

235

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

BMW maintenance system

The maintenance system indicates required

maintenance measures, and thereby provides

support in maintaining road safety and the op‐

erational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases scopes and intervals may vary

according to the country-specific version. Re‐

placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐

cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐

rately. Additional information is available from

the service center.

Condition Based Service

CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐

count the driving conditions of your vehicle.

Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐

nizes the maintenance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt the

amount of maintenance corresponding to your

user profile.

Detailed information on service requirements,

refer to page 94, can be displayed on the Con‐

trol Display.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is

continuously stored in the remote control.

Your service center will read out this data and

suggest the right array of service procedures

for your vehicle.

Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐

mote control with which the vehicle was driven

most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐

tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐

count.

If this occurs, have a service center update the

time-dependent maintenance procedures,

such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,

changing the engine oil and the microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US

models and Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐

formation Booklet for US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐

els for additional information on service re‐

quirements.

Maintenance and repair should be performed

by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐

ular maintenance procedures recorded in the

vehicle's Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐

els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐

nance.

Seite 236

Mobility Maintenance

236

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis

Note

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

The socket for onboard diagnostics may

only be used by the service center or a work‐

shop that operates in accordance with the

specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with

correspondingly trained personnel and other

authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result

in operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐

cle's emissions.

Emissions

▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have

the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain

circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive mis‐

firing in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the

system checked immediately; otherwise,

serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐

riod can seriously damage emission con‐

trol components, in particular the catalytic

converter.

Seite 237

Maintenance Mobility

237

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in a

fold-down cover in the trunk lid.

Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Wiper blade replacement

Hints

Do not fold down the wipers without

wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades

have not been installed; this may damage the

windshield.◀

Replacing the wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 78, the wiper arms.

2. Fold up the wipers.

3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐

sition.

4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order

of removal until it locks in place.

6. Fold down the wipers.

Lamp and bulb replacement

Hints

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐

tion to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

that you entrust corresponding procedures to

Seite 238

Mobility Replacing components

238

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

the service center if you are unfamiliar those or

if they have not been described here.

You can obtain a selection of replacement

bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns

Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is a danger of getting

burned.◀

Working on the lighting system

When working on the lighting system,

you should always reel off the lights affected to

prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage

when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions

provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not perform work/bulb replacement

on xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,

including bulb replacement, performed only by

a service center. Due to the high voltage

present in the system, there is a danger of fatal

injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

Do not touch the bulbs

Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of

contamination will burn into the bulb's surface

and reduce its service life.

Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,

or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting

diodes installed behind a cover as a light

source.

These light-emitting diodes, which are related

to conventional lasers, are officially designated

as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers

Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;

otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐

ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When

driving with the light switched on, the conden‐

sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐

light glass does not need to be changed.

If the headlights do not dim despite driving

with the light switched on, increasing humidity

forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the

service center check this.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected by

changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐

lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐

ice after a replacement.

Front lights, bulb replacement

Xenon headlights

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lights

2 Parking lamp, daytime running lights

3 Low beams/high beams

4 Turn signal

Seite 239

Replacing components Mobility

239

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Hints

Because of the long life of these bulbs, the

likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the

lights on and off frequently shortens their life.

If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and

continue the trip with great care. Comply with

local regulations.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement

on xenon headlights

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,

including bulb replacement, performed only by

a service center. Due to the high voltage

present in the system, there is a danger of fatal

injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,

please contact your BMW center.

Parking lights and roadside parking lamp

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

These lights feature LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a

malfunction.

Accessing the bulbs

Remove the screws and fold down the lid.

Turn signal

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

The illustration shows the left side of the en‐

gine compartment.

24-watt bulb, PY.

Unscrew the lid, remove it, and change the

bulb.

Corner-illuminating lights

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

The illustration shows the left side of the en‐

gine compartment.

55-watt bulb, H7.

Fold open the cover in the engine compart‐

ment.

2. Unscrew the lid and remove it.

Seite 240

Mobility Replacing components

240

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

3. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise.

4. Remove the bulb and replace it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

LED headlights

At a glance

1 Corner-illuminating lights

2 Low beams/high beams

3 Parking lamp, daytime running lights

4 Turn signal

5 Side marker lights

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

With LED headlights, all front lights and side

indicators are designed with LED technology.

If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights

and continue the trip with great care. Comply

with local regulations.

Contact your service center in the event of a

malfunction.

LED front fog lights

These front fog lights are made using LED

technology. Contact your service center in the

event of a malfunction.

Turn signal in exterior mirror

The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature

LED technology. Contact your service center

in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

At a glance

1 Turn signal

2 Reversing lamp

3 Inside brake lamp

4 Rear lamp

5 Outside brake lamp

6 Rear reflector

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and

license plate lights

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

These lights feature LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a

malfunction.

Seite 241

Replacing components Mobility

241

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Lights in the trunk lid

Access to the lights

1. Remove the three screws using the screw

driver from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

2. Fold away the cover.

Inside brake lamp

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

21-watt bulb, H21W.

The illustration shows the position of the bulb

in the installed bulb holder.

Squeeze the clips together and remove the

bulb holder.

Press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn coun‐

terclockwise and remove.

Reversing lamp

Follow general instructions, refer to page 238.

16-watt bulb, W16W.

The illustration shows the position of the bulb

in the installed bulb holder.

Squeeze the clips together and remove the

bulb holder.

Pull out the bulb and replace it.

Seite 242

Mobility Replacing components

242

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Changing wheels

Hints

When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire

does not need to be changed immediately in

the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.

Which is why no spare tire is available.

The tools for changing wheels are available as

accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free.

The added amount of acid is sufficient for the

service life of the battery.

Further information about the battery can be

obtained from your service center.

Battery replacement

Use approved vehicle batteries only

Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;

otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and

systems or functions may not be fully availa‐

ble.◀

After a battery replacement, have the battery

registered on the vehicle by the service center

to ensure that all comfort features are fully

available and that any Check Control mes‐

sages of these comfort features are no longer

displayed.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐

ciently charged to guarantee that the battery

remains usable for its full service life.

The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐

lowing cases:

▷ When making frequent short-distance

drives.

▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐

riods, longer than a month.

Hints

Do not connect charging devices to the

12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐

tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as

this may damage the vehicle battery due to an

increased power consumption.◀

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the

starting aid terminals, refer to page 247, in the

engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, some equipment

needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐

tings updated, e. g.:

▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again.

▷ Time: update.

▷ Date: update.

▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to

page 51.

Seite 243

Replacing components Mobility

243

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by your

service center or bring them to a recy‐

cling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for

transport and storage. Secure the battery so

that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Hints

Replacing fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐

tute of another color or amperage rating; this

could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐

sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse

types and locations are stored in the fuse box

in the trunk.

In the glove compartment

Push the handle up, arrow 1, and open the lid,

arrow 2.

In the trunk

Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.

Seite 244

Mobility Replacing components

244

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent Emergency

Request

The concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐

quest can be made through this system.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Hints

Emergency Request not guaranteed

For technical reasons, the Emergency

Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐

able conditions.◀

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.

▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.

▷ The Assist system is functional.

Initiating an Emergency Request

Press the cover briefly to open it.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the

button lights up green.

▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency

Request was initiated.

If a cancel prompt appears on the display,

the Emergency Request can be aborted.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle

until the voice connection has been estab‐

lished.

▷ The LED flashes green when a connection

to the BMW Response Center has been

established.

Seite 245

Breakdown assistance Mobility

245

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

When the emergency request is received

at the BMW Response Center, the BMW

Response Center contacts you and takes

further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the

BMW Response Center can take further

steps to help you under certain circum‐

stances.

For this, data are transmitted to the BMW

Response Center which serve to deter‐

mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.

the current position of the vehicle, if it can

be established.

▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW

Response Center can no longer be heard

via the speaker, you can nevertheless still

be heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐

quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐

ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐

fication is not affected by pressing the SOS

button.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the container

on the inside of the trunk lid.

Unscrew the wing nut to open.

First aid kit

Note

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents

regularly and replace any expired items

promptly.

Storage

The first aid kit is located in the container on

the inside of the trunk lid.

Unscrew the wing nut to open.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be

started using the battery of another vehicle

and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐

bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Hints

Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐

jury, always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running.◀

To prevent personal injury or damage to both

vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐

dure.

Seite 246

Mobility Breakdown assistance

246

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Preparation

Bodywork contact between vehicles

Make sure that there is no contact be‐

tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐

wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀

1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐

mation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐

cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power

consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

Connecting order

Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀

The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐

gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐

tive terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the

battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables

1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐

minal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the

battery, or to the corresponding starting

aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐

tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end

of the cable to the positive terminal of the

battery, or to the corresponding starting

aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative

jumper cable to the negative terminal of

the battery, or to the corresponding engine

or body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the

negative terminal of the battery, or to the

corresponding engine or body ground of

the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐

creased idle speed.

If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐

gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle

run for approx. 10 minutes.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be

started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not success‐

ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐

other attempt in order to allow the dis‐

charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐

verse order.

Check the battery and recharge if needed.

Seite 247

Breakdown assistance Mobility

247

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tow-starting and towing

Note

Tow-starting and towing

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the

Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐

tions of the individual braking systems might

lead to accidents.◀

Steptronic transmission: transporting

your vehicle

Note

Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Therefore, contact a service center in the

event of a breakdown.

Do not have the vehicle towed

Have your vehicle transported on a load‐

ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐

cur.◀

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on a

loading platform.

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.◀

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐

sitioning the vehicle.

Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicle

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing

When the parking brake is blocked

The parking brake cannot be released

manually.

Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake

blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.

Contact your service center.◀

Follow the towing instructions

Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,

vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;

otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn

signals, and wipers may be unavailable.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle

tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no

power assist. Consequently, more force

needs to be applied when braking and

steering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐

quired.

▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,

it will not be possible to control the vehi‐

cle's response.

Seite 248

Mobility Breakdown assistance

248

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Tow truck

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.◀

Towing other vehicles

Hints

Light towing vehicle

The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will

not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐

sponse.◀

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow

fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may

cause damage.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐

pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly

identify the vehicle being towed by placing

a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐

dow.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting

the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe

the following:

▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.

▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure

that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses

on the vehicle components when towing, al‐

ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐

ried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front

or rear of the BMW.

The tow fitting is located in the container on

the inside of the trunk lid.

Tow fitting, information on use

▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the

vehicle can occur.◀

Seite 249

Breakdown assistance Mobility

249

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Screw thread for tow fitting

Push out the cover by pressing on the top

edge.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to

the transmission.

Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but

start the engine by jump-starting, refer to

page 246. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐

alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐

gine is cold.

Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.

2. Ignition, refer to page 69, on.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐

ately press on the clutch pedal again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow

bar or rope, and switch off the hazard

warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 250

Mobility Breakdown assistance

250

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Car washes

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as

leaves in the area below the windshield when

the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in

winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐

age the vehicle.

Hints

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away

and use a maximum temperature of

140 ℉/60 ℃.

If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a

distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐

tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐

sively high pressures or temperatures can

cause damage or preliminary damage that may

then lead to long-term damage.

Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure

washer.◀

Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with

high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors and camera lenses on the

outside of the vehicle for long periods and

maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀

Automatic car washes

Hints

Note the following:

▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order to

avoid paint damage.

▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not

damaged by the transport mechanisms.

▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they

may be damaged, depending on the width

of the vehicle.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to

page 77, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐

vation.

▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can

be triggered by the interior motion sensor

of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐

tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,

refer to page 48.

Guide rails in car washes

Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body

could be damaged.◀

Before driving into a car wash

In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a

car wash, take the following steps:

Manual transmission:

Drive into the car wash.

2. Shift to neutral.

Seite 251

Care Mobility

251

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

3. Switch the engine off.

4. Switch on the ignition.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Drive into the car wash.

2. Engage selector lever position N.

3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to

page 75.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched

on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐

played.

Do not turn off the ignition in the car

wash

Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash;

otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐

gaged and damages can result.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside

when in selector lever position N. A signal

sounds when an attempt is made to lock the

vehicle.

To start the engine with manual transmission:

Press on the clutch pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐

sion:

Depress the brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐

ping on the brake turns the ignition off.

Selector lever position

Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐

cally:

▷ When the ignition is switched off.

▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlights

▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

acidic cleansers.

▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,

from insects, with shampoo and wash off

with water.

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an

ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes

briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action

can be reduced and corrosion of the brake

discs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the win‐

dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to

smearing and to reduce wiper noises and

wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Car care products

BMW recommends using care and cleaning

products from BMW, since these have been

tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products

Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or

windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐

cles.

Cleansers can contain substances that are

dangerous and harmful to your health.◀

Vehicle paint

Regular care contributes to driving safety and

value retention. Environmental influences in

areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐

taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐

fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐

quency and extent of your car care to these

influences.

Seite 252

Mobility Care

252

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,

grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐

mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐

tered or discolored.

Only use respectively approved cleaning and

care products for vehicles with matte finish.

Suitable care products for matte finishes are

available from the service center.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather often, using a

cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime

chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased

wear and premature degradation of the leather

surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from

clothing, provide leather care roughly every

two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐

cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially

more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and

grease will gradually break down the protective

layer of the leather surface.

Suitable care products are available from the

service center.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage

stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth

with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using

large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the

material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fasteners

Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or

other articles of clothing can damage the seat

covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are

closed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral

wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.

Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam

jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐

turer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents

can destroy the protective layer of adjacent

components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radia‐

tor grille or door handles with an ample supply

of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐

ularly when they have been exposed to road

salt.

Rubber components

Aside from water, treat only with rubber

cleansers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any

silicon-containing car care products in order to

avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐

nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a

soft cloth.

Plastic components

These include:

▷ Imitation leather surfaces.

▷ Roofliner.

▷ Lamp lenses.

▷ Instrument cluster cover.

▷ Matt black spray-coated components.

▷ Painted parts in the interior.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Seite 253

Care Mobility

253

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐

vents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or

solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead

to surface damage.◀

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and

thus have a negative impact on safety.

Chemical cleaning

Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety

belts clipped into their buckles.

Do not allow the reels to retract the safety

belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the

function of the pedals could be impeded while

driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing

mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved

for the vehicle and can be properly attached to

floor.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐

tened again after they were removed for clean‐

ing, e.g.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a

microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.

To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and

forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a

cloth moistened with a small amount of glass

detergent.

Displays/monitors

Cleaning displays and screens

Do not use any chemical or household

cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐

fected.◀

Keeping out moisture

Keep all fluids and moisture away from

the unit; otherwise, electrical components can

be damaged.◀

Avoid pressure

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning

and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,

damage can result.◀

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than

three months, special measures must be

taken. Additional information is available from

the service center.

Seite 254

Mobility Care

254

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Seite 255

Care Mobility

255

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Reference

This chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the information

you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the

series. It also describes features that are not

necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. This

also applies to safety-related functions and

systems. The respectively applicable country

provisions must be observed when using the

respective features and systems.

Note

The technical data and specifications in this

Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.

The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,

for example, due to the selected special equip‐

ment, country version or country-specific

measurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa‐

tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained

from the service center.

The information in the vehicle documents al‐

ways has priority.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the

model version, equipment or country-specific

measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account

attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,

for example, due to the selected special equip‐

ment, tires, load and chassis version.

BMW 5 Series Sedan

Width with mirrors inches/mm 82.8/2,102

Width without mirrors inches/mm 73.2/1,860

Height inches/mm 57.6/1,464

Length inches/mm 193.4/4,913

Wheelbase inches/mm 116.9/2,968

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.4/12-39.7/12.1

Seite 258

Reference Technical data

258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Weights

528i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,971/2,255

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,359/1,070

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,844/1,290

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,181/2,350

Load lbs/kg 992/450

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,491/1,130

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

550i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,401/2,450

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,712/1,230

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,932/1,330

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535d

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,300/2,404

Load lbs/kg 950/431

Seite 259

Technical data Reference

259

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

535d

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,550/1,157

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

528i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,170/2,345

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,447/1,110

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,888/1,310

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

535i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,379/2,440

Load lbs/kg 992/450

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,701/1,225

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

550i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,600/2,540

Load lbs/kg 948/430

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,800/1,270

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,954/1,340

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

Seite 260

Reference Technical data

260

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

535d xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,390/2,445

Load lbs/kg 950/431

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,700/1,225

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,910/1,320

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 18.4/520

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to

page 206

Seite 261

Technical data Reference

261

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Index

ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 135

ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 143

Acceleration Assistant, refer

to Launch Control 82

Accessories and parts 7

Activated-charcoal filter 168

Active Blind Spot Detec‐

tion 131

Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 143

Active Protection 132

Active seat, front 56

Active seat ventilation,

front 57

Active Steering, integral 139

Adaptive brake assistant 135

Adaptive brake lights, refer to

Brake force display 132

Adaptive drive 138

Adaptive Light Control 104

Additives, oil 233

Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 53

After washing vehicle 252

Airbags 108

Airbags, indicator/warning

light 109

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated-air mode 167

Air, dehumidifying, refer to

Cooling function 167

Air distribution, manual 166

Air flow, automatic climate

control 166

Air outlets, see ventila‐

tion 168

Air pressure, tires 211

Alarm system 47

Alarm, unintentional 48

All around the center con‐

sole 16

All around the roofliner 17

All around the steering

wheel 14

All-season tires, refer to Win‐

ter tires 224

All-wheel-drive 137

Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 173

Alternative oil types 233

Ambient light 107

Animal detection, see Night

Vision 126

Antifreeze, washer fluid 78

Antilock Brake System,

ABS 135

Anti-slip control, refer to

DSC 135

Approved axle load 259

Approved engine oils, see

Suitable engine oil

types 233

Armrest, refer to Center arm‐

rest 182

Arrival time 98

Ashtray 174

Ashtray, front 174, 175

Ashtray, rear 175

Assistance when driving

off 135

Attentiveness assistant 133

AUTO H button 74

AUTO H button, refer to Au‐

tomatic Hold 74

AUTO intensity 166

Automatic car wash 251

Automatic climate con‐

trol 165

Automatic Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 143

Automatic Curb Monitor 62

Automatic deactivation, front-

seat passenger airbags 110

Automatic headlight con‐

trol 104

Automatic Hold 74

Automatic locking 46

Automatic recirculated-air

control 167

Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 40

Automatic transmission, see

Steptronic transmission 79

Automatic trunk lid 41

AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 166

AUTO program, intensity 166

Auto Start/Stop function 71

Average fuel consumption 98

Average speed 98

Axle loads, weights 259

Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 55

Backrest, width 55

Band-aids, refer to First aid

kit 246

Bar for tow-starting/

towing 249

Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 243

Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 35

Battery, vehicle 243

Belts, safety belts 57

Beverage holder, cu‐

pholder 183

Seite 262

Reference Everything from A to Z

262

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Blinds, sun protection 49

BMW Advanced Diesel 207

BMW Assist, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐

tertainment and Communi‐

cation

BMW Driver’s Guide App 6

BMW Homepage 6

BMW Internet page 6

BMW maintenance sys‐

tem 236

Bonus range, ECO PRO 197

Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 183

Brake assistant 135

Brake assistant, adaptive 135

Brake discs, break-in 188

Brake force display 132

Brake lights, adaptive 132

Brake lights, brake force dis‐

play 132

Brake lights, bulb replace‐

ment 241

Brake pads, break-in 188

Braking, hints 190

Breakdown assistance 245

Break-in 188

Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 100

Bulb replacement 238

Bulb replacement, front 239

Bulb replacement, rear 241

Bulbs and lights 238

Button, RES 146

Button, Start/Stop 69

Bypassing, refer to Jump-

starting 246

California Proposition 65

Warning 7

Calling up mirror adjust‐

ment 46

Calling up seat adjust‐

ment 46

Calling up steering wheel ad‐

justment 46

Camera lenses, care 254

Camera, rearview cam‐

era 155

Camera, Side View 157

Camera, Top View 159

Can holder, refer to Cu‐

pholder 183

Car battery 243

Car care products 252

Care, displays 254

Care, vehicle 252

Cargo 192

Cargo area, enlarging 177

Cargo area, storage compart‐

ments 184

Cargo, securing 193

Cargo straps, securing

cargo 193

Car key, refer to Remote con‐

trol 34

Carpet, care 254

Car wash 251

Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 189

CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 236

CD/Multimedia, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐

tertainment and Communi‐

cation

Center armrest 182

Center console 16

Central locking system 40

Central screen, refer to Con‐

trol Display 18

Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 7

Changing parts 238

Changing wheels 243

Changing wheels/tires 223

Chassis number, see vehicle

identification number 9

Check Control 88

Checking the engine oil level

electronically 231

Checking the oil level elec‐

tronically 231

Children, seating position 65

Children, transporting

safely 65

Child restraint fixing sys‐

tem 65

Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 66

Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 65

Child safety locks 68

Child seat, mounting 65

Child seats 65

Chrome parts, care 253

Cigarette lighter 174

Cleaning displays 254

Climate control 165

Climate control laminated

tinted safety glass 189

Climate control wind‐

shield 189

Clock 93

Closing/opening via door

lock 39

Closing/opening with remote

control 37

Closing the trunk lid with no-

touch activation 44

Clothes hooks 184

Coasting 199

Coasting with engine decou‐

pled, coasting 199

Coasting with idling en‐

gine 199

Cold starting, refer to Starting

the engine 70

Combination reel, refer to

Turn signals 76

Combination switch, refer to

Wiper system 77

COMFORT+ program, Driving

Dynamics Control 141

Comfort Access 43

Seite 263

Everything from A to Z Reference

263

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

COMFORT program, Driving

Dynamics Control 141

Compressor 224

Computer, refer to On-board

computer 97

Condensation on win‐

dows 166

Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 191

Condition Based Service

CBS 236

Configure driving mode 141

Confirmation signal 46

ConnectedDrive, see user's

manual for Navigation, En‐

tertainment and Communi‐

cation

ConnectedDrive Services

Continued driving with a flat

tire 113, 116

Control Display 18

Control Display, settings 99

Controller 18

Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 135

Convenient opening with the

remote control 37

Coolant 234

Coolant level 234

Coolant temperature 92

Cooling function 167

Cooling, maximum 167

Cooling system 234

Cornering light 104

Corrosion on brake discs 190

Cosmetic mirror 174

Courtesy lamps during un‐

locking 37

Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐

cle locked 38

Cruise control 150

Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 143

Cruise Control, refer to Active

Cruise Control 143

Cruising range 93

Cupholder 183

Current fuel consumption 93

Damage, tires 222

Damping control, dy‐

namic 138

Data, technical 258

Date 93

Daytime running lights 104

Defrosting, refer to Windows,

defrosting 166

Dehumidifying, air 167

Deleting personal data 24

Deletion of personal data 24

Destination distance 98

Diesel exhaust fluid, at low

temperatures 208

Diesel exhaust fluid, having

refilled 208

Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐

mum 208

Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐

ishing yourself 208

Diesel particulate filter 189

Digital clock 93

Dimensions 258

Dimmable exterior mirrors 63

Dimmable interior rearview

mirror 63

Direction indicator, refer to

Turn signals 76

Display, electronic, instru‐

ment cluster 84

Display in windshield 101

Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 106

Displays 85

Displays, cleaning 254

Disposal, coolant 235

Disposal, vehicle battery 244

Distance control, refer to

PDC 152

Distance to destination 98

Divided screen view, split

screen 23

Door lock 39

Door lock, refer to Remote

control 34

Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐

ing 40

Downhill control 137

Drive-off assistant 135

Drive-off assistant, refer to

DSC 135

Driver assistance, refer to In‐

telligent Safety 117

Driving Assistant, refer to In‐

telligent Safety 117

Driving Dynamics Con‐

trol 139

Driving instructions, break-

in 188

Driving mode 139

Driving notes, general 188

Driving stability control sys‐

tems 135

Driving tips 188

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 135

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 136

Dynamic Damping Con‐

trol 138

Dynamic Drive 138

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 135

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 136

ECO PRO 196

ECO PRO, bonus range 197

ECO PRO display 196

ECO PRO displays 86

ECO PRO driving mode 196

ECO PRO mode 196

ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐

struction 198

Seite 264

Reference Everything from A to Z

264

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

EfficientDynamics 199

Electronic displays, instru‐

ment cluster 84

Electronic oil measure‐

ment 231

Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to DSC 135

Emergency detection, remote

control 35

Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 204

Emergency Request 245

Emergency start function, en‐

gine start 35

Emergency unlocking, trans‐

mission lock 82

Emergency unlocking, trunk

lid 43

Energy Control 93

Energy recovery 94

Engine, automatic Start/Stop

function 71

Engine, automatic switch-

off 71

Engine compartment 229

Engine compartment, work‐

ing in 229

Engine coolant 234

Engine idling when driving,

coasting 199

Engine oil 231

Engine oil, adding 232

Engine oil additives 233

Engine oil change 233

Engine oil filler neck 232

Engine oil temperature 92

Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 233

Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 233

Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 35

Engine start, jump-start‐

ing 246

Engine start, refer to Starting

the engine 70

Engine stop 71

Engine temperature 92

Entering a car wash 251

Equipment, interior 172

Error displays, see Check

Control 88

ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to DSC 135

Exchanging wheels/tires 223

Exhaust system 189

Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 63

Exterior mirrors 62

External start 246

External temperature dis‐

play 93

External temperature warn‐

ing 93

Eyes for securing cargo 193

Failure message, see Check

Control 88

False alarm, refer to Uninten‐

tional alarm 48

Fan, refer to Air flow 166

Filler neck for engine oil 232

Fine wood, care 253

First aid kit 246

Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐

ting 249

Flat tire, changing

wheels 243

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 115

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 111

Flat tire, warning

lamp 112, 115

Flooding 190

Floor carpet, care 254

Floor mats, care 254

Fold down the rear seat back‐

rest, see Though-loading

system 177

Fold-out position, wiper 78

Foot brake 190

Front airbags 108

Front-end collision warning

with braking function 120

Front-end collision warning

with City Braking func‐

tion 118

Front fog lights 106

Front fog lights, bulb replace‐

ment 241

Front lights 239

front-seat passenger airbags,

automatic deactivation 110

Front-seat passenger airbags,

indicator lamp 110

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 115

Fuel 206

Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consump‐

tion 98

Fuel filler flap 204

Fuel gauge 92

Fuel lid 204

Fuel quality 206

Fuel recommendation 206

Fuel, tank capacity 261

Fuse 244

Garage door opener, refer to

Universal Integrated Remote

Control 172

Gasoline 206

Gear change, Steptronic

transmission 80

Gear shift indicator 95

General driving notes 188

Glare shield 174

Glass sunroof, powered 50

Glove compartment 181

Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 259

Seite 265

Everything from A to Z Reference

265

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 73

Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 173

Hazard warning flashers 245

HDC Hill Descent Con‐

trol 137

Head airbags 108

Headlight control, auto‐

matic 104

Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 104

Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture via remote control 38

Headlight flasher 76

Headlight glass 239

Headlights 239

Headlights, care 252

Headlight washer system 77

Head restraints 53

Head restraints, front 58

Head restraints, rear 60

Head-up Display 101

Head-up Display, care 254

Heavy cargo, stowing 193

Height, vehicle 258

High-beam Assistant 105

High beams 76

High beams/low beams, refer

to High-beam Assistant 105

Hill Descent Control

HDC 137

Hills 190

Hill start assistant, refer to

Drive-off assistant 135

Hints 6

Holder for beverages 183

Homepage 6

Hood 229

Horn 14

Hotel function, trunk lid 42

Hot exhaust system 189

HUD Head-up Display 101

Hydroplaning 189

Ice warning, see External

temperature warning 93

Icy roads, see External tem‐

perature warning 93

Identification marks, tires 220

Identification number, see ve‐

hicle identification num‐

ber 9

iDrive 18

Ignition key, refer to Remote

control 34

Ignition off 69

Ignition on 69

Indication of a flat

tire 112, 115

Indicator and alarm lamps,

see Check Control 88

Indicator lamp, see Check

Control 88

Individual air distribution 166

Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 35

Inflation pressure, tires 211

Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 115

Info display, refer to On-

Board computer 97

Initialization, Integral Active

Steering 139

Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 112

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 115

Instrument cluster 84

Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 84

Instrument display, multifunc‐

tional 85

Instrument lighting 106

Integral Active Steering 139

Integrated key 34

Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle 29

Intelligent Emergency Re‐

quest 245

Intelligent Safety 117

Intensity, AUTO pro‐

gram 166

Interior equipment 172

Interior lights 106

Interior lights during unlock‐

ing 37

Interior lights with the vehicle

locked 38

Interior motion sensor 48

Interior rearview mirror, auto‐

matic dimming feature 63

Interior rearview mirror, man‐

ually dimmable 63

Internet page 6

Interval display, service re‐

quirements 94

Interval mode 77

Jacking points for the vehicle

jack 243

Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 80

Jump-starting 246

Key/remote control 34

Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 43

Key Memory, refer to Per‐

sonal Profile 35

Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 80

Knee airbag 109

Lamp replacement 238

Lamp replacement, front 239

Lamp replacement, rear 241

Lane departure warning 129

Seite 266

Reference Everything from A to Z

266

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Lane margin, warning 129

Language on Control Dis‐

play 100

Lashing eyes, securing

cargo 193

LATCH child restraint sys‐

tem 66

Launch Control 82

Leather, care 253

LED front fog lights, bulb re‐

placement 241

LED headlights, bulb replace‐

ment 241

LED light 241

LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 239

Length, vehicle 258

Letters and numbers, enter‐

ing 24

License plate lamp, bulb re‐

placement 241

Light alloy wheels, care 253

Light control 104

Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 239

Lighter, front 174, 175

Lighter, rear 176

Lighting 103

Lighting, speaker 107

Lights 103

Lights and bulbs 238

Light switch 103

Load 193

Loading 192

Lock, door 39

Locking/unlocking via door

lock 39

Locking/unlocking with re‐

mote control 37

Locking, automatic 46

Locking, settings 46

Locking via trunk lid 41

Lock, power window 49

Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 68

Low beams 103

Low beams, automatic, refer

to High-beam Assistant 105

Lower back support 55

Low-Sulfur Diesel 207

Luggage rack, see Roof-

mounted luggage rack 193

Lumbar support 55

Maintenance 236

Maintenance require‐

ments 236

Maintenance, service require‐

ments 94

Maintenance system,

BMW 236

Make-up mirror 174

Malfunction displays, see

Check Control 88

Manual air distribution 166

Manual air flow 166

Manual brake, refer to Parking

brake 73

Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 81

Manual operation, door

lock 39

Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 62

Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 204

Manual operation, Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 153

Manual operation, rearview

camera 155

Manual operation, Side

Manual operation, Top

Manual transmission 79

Marking on approved

tires 223

Marking, run-flat tires 224

Massage seat, front 56

Master key, refer to Remote

control 34

Maximum cooling 167

Maximum speed, display 95

Maximum speed, winter

tires 224

Measure, units of 100

Medical kit 246

Memory for seat, mirrors,

steering wheel 61

Menu, EfficientDynamics 199

Menu in instrument clus‐

ter 96

Menus, operating, iDrive 18

Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 19

Messages, see Check Con‐

trol 88

Microfilter 168

Minimum tread, tires 222

Mirror 62

Mirror memory 61

Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 189

Mobility System 224

Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 7

Moisture in headlight 239

Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐

play 18

Mounting of child restraint

systems 65

Multifunctional instrument

display 85

Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 14

Navigation, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐

ment and Communication

Neck restraints, front, refer to

Head restraints 58

Neck restraints, rear, refer to

Head restraints 60

Seite 267

Everything from A to Z Reference

267

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Neutral cleaner, see wheel

cleaner 253

New wheels and tires 223

Night Vision 126

Night Vision device, see Night

Vision 126

Nylon rope for tow-starting/

towing 249

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 237

OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐

agnosis 237

Object detection, see Night

Vision 126

Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 156

Octane rating, refer to Rec‐

ommended fuel grade 206

Odometer 92

Office, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment

and Communication

Oil 231

Oil, adding 232

Oil additives 233

Oil change 233

Oil change interval, service

requirements 94

Oil filler neck 232

Oil types, alternative 233

Oil types, approved 233

Old batteries, disposal 244

On-board computer 97

Onboard monitor, refer to

Control Display 18

Onboard vehicle tool kit 238

Opening/closing via door

lock 39

Opening and closing 34

Opening and closing, without

remote control 39

Opening and closing, with re‐

mote control 37

Opening the trunk lid with no-

touch activation 44

Operating concept, iDrive 18

Optional equipment, standard

equipment 6

Outside air, refer to Auto‐

matic recirculated-air con‐

trol 167

Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 92

Paint, vehicle 252

Parallel parking assistant 160

Park Distance Control

PDC 152

Parked-car ventilation 171

Parked vehicle, condensa‐

tion 191

Parking aid, refer to PDC 152

Parking assistant 160

Parking brake 73

Parking lights 103

Parking with Automatic

Hold 74

Particulate filter 189

Parts and accessories 7

Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 62

Pathway lines, rearview cam‐

era 156

PDC Park Distance Con‐

trol 152

Pedestrian detection, see

Night Vision 126

Pedestrian warning with city

braking function 123

Personal Profile 35

Personal Profile, exporting

profiles 36

Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 51

Pinch protection system, win‐

dows 49

Plastic, care 253

Power failure 243

Power sunroof, glass 50

Power windows 48

Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 211

Pressure warning FTM,

tires 115

Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 35

Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 23

Protective function, glass

sunroof 51

Protective function, win‐

dows 49

Push-and-turn switch, refer to

Controller 18

Radiator fluid 234

Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control 34

Radio ready state 69

Radio, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment

and Communication

Rain sensor 77

Rear automatic climate con‐

trol 169

Rear axle steering 139

Rear lights 241

Rear socket 177

Rearview camera 154

Rearview mirror 62

Rear window defroster 167

Recirculated-air mode 167

Recommended fuel

grade 206

Recommended tire

brands 223

Refueling 204

Remaining range 93

Remote control/key 34

Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 38

Seite 268

Reference Everything from A to Z

268

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Remote control, univer‐

sal 172

Replacement fuse 244

Replacing parts 238

Replacing wheels/tires 223

Reporting safety defects 9

RES button 146

RES button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 143

RES button, see Cruise con‐

trol 150

Reserve warning, refer to

Range 93

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 112

Residual heat, automatic cli‐

mate control 168

Retaining straps, securing

cargo 193

Retreaded tires 223

Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐

ment 242

Roadside parking lights 104

Roller sunblinds 49

Roll stabilization, refer to

Adaptive Drive 138

Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐

namic Drive 138

RON recommended fuel

grade 206

Roofliner 17

Roof load capacity 259

Roof-mounted luggage

rack 193

Rope for tow-starting/

towing 249

RSC Run Flat System Com‐

ponent, refer to Run-flat

tires 224

Rubber components,

care 253

Run-flat tires 224

Safe braking 190

Safety 7

Safety belt reminder for driv‐

er's seat and front passen‐

ger seat 58

Safety belts 57

Safety belts, care 254

Safety Package, refer to Ac‐

tive Protection 132

Safety switch, windows 49

Safety systems, airbags 108

Saving fuel 195

Screen, refer to Control Dis‐

play 18

Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐

hicle tool kit 238

Screw thread, refer to Screw

thread for tow fitting, screw

thread for tow fitting 250

Sealant 224

Seat belts, refer to Safety

belts 57

Seat heating, front 56

Seat heating, rear 56

Seating position for chil‐

dren 65

Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 61

Seats 53

Seat ventilation, front 57

Selection list in instrument

cluster 96

Selector lever, Steptronic

transmission 80

Sensors, care 254

Service and warranty 8

Service requirements, Condi‐

tion Based Service

CBS 236

Service requirements, dis‐

play 94

Services, ConnectedDrive

SET button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 143

SET button, see Cruise con‐

trol 150

Settings, locking/unlock‐

ing 46

Settings on Control Dis‐

play 99

Settings, storing for seat, mir‐

rors, steering wheel 61

Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 81

Shift point indicator 87

Shoulder support 56

Side airbags 108

Side View 157

Signaling, horn 14

Signals when unlocking 46

Sitting safely 53

Size 258

Ski bag 179

Slide/tilt glass roof 50

Smallest turning radius 258

Smoker's package 174

Snow chains 228

Socket 176

Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 237

Soot particulate filter 189

SOS button 245

Spare fuse 244

Speaker lighting 107

Specified engine oil

types 233

Speed, average 98

Speed limit detection, on-

board computer 98

Speed limiter, display 95

Speed Limit Information 95

Speed warning 99

Split screen 23

SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control 140

Sport displays, torque dis‐

play, performance dis‐

play 99

SPORT program, driving dy‐

namics 140

Sport program, transmis‐

sion 81

Seite 269

Everything from A to Z Reference

269

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Stability control systems 135

Start/stop, automatic func‐

tion 71

Start/Stop button 69

Start function during malfunc‐

tion 35

Starting the engine 70

Status control display,

tires 112

Status information, iDrive 22

Status of Owner's Manual 7

Steering, Integral Active

Steering 139

Steering wheel, adjusting 63

Steering wheel heating 64

Steering wheel memory 61

Steptronic Sport transmis‐

sion, refer to Steptronic

transmission 79

Steptronic transmission 79

Stopping the engine 71

Storage compartment, re‐

mote control 184

Storage compartments 181

Storage compartments, loca‐

tions 181

Storage, tires 224

Storing the vehicle 254

Suitable engine oils 233

Summer tires, tread 222

Sun visor 174

Supplementary text mes‐

sage 91

Surround View 154

Suspension settings 139

Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 139

Switch-on times, parked-car

ventilation 171

Switch, refer to Cockpit 14

Symbols 6

Symbols in the status field 22

SYNC program, automatic cli‐

mate control 167

Tachometer 92

Tail and brake lights 241

Tail lights 241

Tail lights, bulb replace‐

ment 241

Technical changes, refer to

Safety 7

Technical data 258

Telephone, see user's manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐

ment and Communication

Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 166

Temperature display for ex‐

ternal temperature 93

Temperature, engine oil 92

Terminal, starting aid 247

Text message, supplemen‐

tary 91

Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 47

Thermal camera, see Night

Vision 126

Thigh support 55

Through-loading system 177

Tilt alarm sensor 47

Time of arrival 98

Tire damage 222

Tire identification marks 220

Tire inflation pressure 211

Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, refer to FTM 115

Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 111

Tires, changing 223

Tire sealant 224

Tires, everything on wheels

and tires 211

Tires, run-flat tires 224

Tire tread 222

Tone, see user's manual for

Navigation, Entertainment

and Communication

Tool 238

Top View 158

Total vehicle weight 259

Touchpad 21

Tow fitting 249

Towing 248

Tow lug, see Tow fitting 249

Tow-starting 248

Tow truck 249

TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 111

Traction control 136

TRACTION, driving dynam‐

ics 136

Transmission lock, electronic

unlocking 82

Transmission, manual trans‐

mission 79

Transmission, see Steptronic

transmission 79

Transporting children

safely 65

Tread, tires 222

Trip computer 98

Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 76

Trip odometer 92

Truck for tow-starting/

towing 249

Trunk lid, automatic 41

Trunk lid closing 41

Trunk lid, closing with no-

touch activation 44

Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐

ing 43

Trunk lid, hotel function 42

Trunk lid opening 40

Trunk lid, opening with no-

touch activation 44

Trunk lid via remote con‐

trol 38

Turning circle 258

Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 156

Turn signals, operation 76

Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐

placement 241

Seite 270

Reference Everything from A to Z

270

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

Unintentional alarm 48

Units of measure 100

Universal remote control 172

Unlock button, Steptronic

transmission 80

Unlocking/locking via door

lock 39

Unlocking/locking with re‐

mote control 37

Unlocking, settings 46

Updates made after the edito‐

rial deadline 7

Upholstery care 253

USB interface 177

Vanity mirror 174

Variable steering, Integral Ac‐

tive Steering 139

Vehicle battery 243

Vehicle battery, replac‐

ing 243

Vehicle, break-in 188

Vehicle care 252

Vehicle features and op‐

tions 6

Vehicle identification num‐

ber 9

Vehicle jack 243

Vehicle paint 252

Vehicle storage 254

Vehicle wash 251

Ventilation 168

Ventilation, refer to Parked-

car ventilation 171

Venting, see ventilation 168

Vent, see ventilation 168

VIN, see vehicle identification

number 9

Voice activation system 26

Warning and indicator lamps,

see Check Control 88

Warning displays, see Check

Control 88

Warning messages, see

Check Control 88

Warning triangle 246

Warranty 7

Washer fluid 78

Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 78

Washer system 77

Washing, vehicle 251

Water on roads 190

Weights 259

Welcome lamps during un‐

locking 37

Welcome lights 103

Wheel base, vehicle 258

Wheel cleaner 253

Wheels, changing 223

Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 211

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 115

Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 111

Width, vehicle 258

Window defroster, rear 167

Windows, powered 48

Windshield, climate con‐

trol 189

Windshield washer fluid 78

Windshield washer noz‐

zles 78

Windshield washer sys‐

tem 77

Windshield wiper 77

Winter diesel 207

Winter storage, care 254

Winter tires, suitable

tires 224

Winter tires, tread 222

Wiper 77

Wiper blades, replacing 238

Wiper fluid 78

Wiper, fold-out position 78

Wiper system 77

Wood, care 253

Word match concept, naviga‐

tion 24

Wrench, see Onboard vehicle

tool kit 238

xDrive 137

Xenon headlights, bulb re‐

placement 239

Seite 271

Everything from A to Z Reference

271

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

More about BMW

bmwusa.com

The Ultimate

Driving Machine®

01 40 2 954 312 ue

*BL295431200W*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 312 - II/15

BMW 2015 550i xDrive Sedan

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

BMW 2015 BMW 550I XDRIVE SEDAN Questions and Answers

Related Products

2016 BMW 535i Sedan

2015 BMW 750i Sedan

2011 BMW 740Li Sedan

2002 BMW 745Li Sedan

BMW 2010 BMW 550i Sedan Car

2003 BMW 540i Sedan